Muratec | F-565 | Specifications | Muratec F-565 Specifications

Muratec
MFX-2050/MFX-1450
F-565/F-525
FACSIMILE SYSTEM
FIELD ENGINEERING MANUAL
MAI version 1
(28 June 2007)
MURATA MACHINERY, LTD
COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT DIV.
DA7-91070-60
Safety Information
LED Safety Label
A LED safety label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below.
Battery Precautions
Important:Muratec does not recommend the independent replacement of the batteries. The batteries
are sold only as component parts of the main control PCB and Connect B PCB, and
cannot be purchased separately from Muratec. Ni-MH (Nickel Metal Hydride) batteries
are installed inside the machine as back up memory batteries. Be sure to dispose of them
according to local, state and federal regulations.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Il y a un danger d'explosion s'il y a un remplacement incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d'un type recommandé par le
constructeur. Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformement aux instructions du fabricant.
Germany only
VORSICHT!
Explosinsgefahr bei unsachgemäßen austausch der Batterie.
Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom hersteller empfohlenen ähnlichen typ. Entsorgung
gebrauchter Batterien nach angaben des herstellers.
Denmark only
Norway only
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.
ADVARSEL
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.
Sweden only
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
Finland only
VAROlTUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, los se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin.
Hävitä Käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
ALL Areas
CAUTION
“Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used IC Package according to the manufacturer’s instructions.”
Germany only
VORSICHT!
”Austausch nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen,
gleichwertigen typ. Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.”
Table of contents
Safety Information...................................................................................................................................a
1 General Description.................................................................................1-1
1.1 Product Description........................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Specifications.................................................................................................................................1-2
2 Machine Composition..............................................................................2-1
2.1 Document Scanning Sequence......................................................................................................2-1
2.2 Recording Section..........................................................................................................................2-5
2.3 Image Processing...........................................................................................................................2-6
2.4 Interconnect Block Diagram.........................................................................................................2-12
2.5 Main Control PCB.........................................................................................................................2-13
2.6 Network Control Unit (NCU) PCB.................................................................................................2-14
2.7 Power Supply Unit (PSU).............................................................................................................2-15
2.8 Sensors........................................................................................................................................2-16
2.9 Function detail and additional information....................................................................................2-18
3 Adjustment Procedures...........................................................................3-1
3.1 Field Service Program Modes........................................................................................................3-1
3.2 Machine Parameter Adjustment.....................................................................................................3-3
3.3 Memory Switch Adjustment..........................................................................................................3-49
3.4 Setting Individual Autodialer Attributes.........................................................................................3-73
3.5 All RAM Clear...............................................................................................................................3-78
3.6 Clear Programmed Data / User Settings......................................................................................3-78
3.7 Unique Switch Adjustment...........................................................................................................3-79
3.8 T.30 Monitor...............................................................................................................................3-103
3.9 Printer maintenance mode.........................................................................................................3-108
3.10 Monitor speaker........................................................................................................................3-110
3.11 Test Modes...............................................................................................................................3-111
3.12 Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switch and Unique Switch Settings................................3-115
3.13 Factory Functions.....................................................................................................................3-115
3.14 Line Tests.................................................................................................................................3-121
3.15 Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode.................................................................................................3-125
3.16 Consumable order sheet..........................................................................................................3-126
3.17 DRAM Clear.............................................................................................................................3-131
3.18 Clear Life Monitor.....................................................................................................................3-132
3.19 Clear Optional Data..................................................................................................................3-132
3.20 Set Service Code.....................................................................................................................3-133
3.21 Life monitor maintenance.........................................................................................................3-134
3.22 Sensor input test......................................................................................................................3-137
3.23 Printer diagnostic mode............................................................................................................3-138
3.24 Network service mode..............................................................................................................3-139
3.25 Multi Line Settings....................................................................................................................3-141
3.26 Flash Rom Sum Check............................................................................................................3-143
3.27 Printer registration adjustment.................................................................................................3-143
3.28 Service Report..........................................................................................................................3-144
3.29 Quick Initial settings.................................................................................................................3-160
3.30 Update the software via Network.............................................................................................3-162
3.31 Update the software.................................................................................................................3-165
3.32 Network Service functions (IP Address : 8000)........................................................................3-174
4 Troubleshooting Procedures...................................................................4-1
4.1 Troubleshooting Outline.................................................................................................................4-1
4.2 Recording Paper Jam.....................................................................................................................4-2
4.3 Document Feeder Jam...................................................................................................................4-2
4.4 Document Feeder Multi-feeding or Skew.......................................................................................4-3
4.5 Mirror Carriage Error (MFX-2050/MFX-1450 only).........................................................................4-3
4.6 Clearing Jammed Paper.................................................................................................................4-3
4.7 Cleaning the Unit............................................................................................................................4-7
4.8 Transmit Error................................................................................................................................4-7
4.9 LCD Error Messages......................................................................................................................4-8
4.10 Error Codes................................................................................................................................4-14
4.11 Service Call Error.......................................................................................................................4-17
4.12 The Image Quality Problems......................................................................................................4-20
4.13 LCD Failure................................................................................................................................4-24
4.14 General Power Failure...............................................................................................................4-24
5 Maintenance & Adjustment......................................................................5-1
5.1 Maintenance schedule...................................................................................................................5-2
5.2 Re/Disassemble.............................................................................................................................5-3
5.3 Adjustment...................................................................................................................................5-70
6 Options....................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Memory Upgrade............................................................................................................................6-1
6.2 Second paper cassette...................................................................................................................6-3
6.3 Page Counter.................................................................................................................................6-5
6.4 PCL printer controller.....................................................................................................................6-7
6.5 Second phone line kit.....................................................................................................................6-8
ii
1 General Description
1.1 Product Description
The MFX-2050, MFX-1450, F-565 and F-525 are Multi-function products with flat bed scanner
(MFX-2050 and MFX-1450) and Group 3 and V.34 HDX modem facsimile machine. Documents are
printed on plain paper using dry electrophotographic printing.
Automatic
document feeder
(ADF)
Document
guides
Document
tray
Document
exit tray
Control panel
Bypass tray
Paper cassette
2nd side cover
2nd paper cassette
(Option)
1st side cover
Front cover
Paper level
Indicator
Platen cover
Telephone
Connectors
PHON
E1
PHON
E2
LINE
Document glass
Second phone line
(Option)
USB connector
Network connector
Paper exit tray
PHON
E1
PHON
E2
LINE
AC power jack
Power switch
Note: F-565 and F-525 have no document glass.
1-1
1.2 Specifications
General specifications
Item
Type
Telephone network
Compatibility
Coding method
Modem speed
Dual Access
LCD
Scanning method
Recording method
Acceptable document size
ADF capacity
Scanning resolution
Effective Scanning width
Transmission speed
Document Memory
Document memory
backup
Printing resolution
MFX-2050/MFX-1450
F-565/F-525
Desktop type
PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) or equivalent.
ITU-T T.4 and T.30
ITU-T-standard MH, MR, MMR and JBIG
33600, 31200, 28800, 26400, 24000, 21600, 19200, 16800, 14400,
12000, 9600, 7200, 4800 and 2400 bps
Allows up to three simultaneous operations.
LCD: 320dots x 240dots.
Language: English, French, Spanish
B/W and Color CCD
Dry electrophotographic (LED)
<ADF>
Single sheet
Two or more sheets
Max:
216 (W) x 900 (L) mm
216 (W) x 356 (L) mm
8.5 (W) x 35.4 (L) inches
8.5 (W) x 14.0 (L) inches
Min:
120 (W) x 100 (L) mm
216 (W) x 139.5m (L) mm
4.7 (W) x 25.4 (L) inches
8.5 (W) x 55.0 (L) inches
Paper weight: 35 – 128 g/m2
52 – 105 g/m2
Thickness:
0.05 – 0.15 mm
0.07 – 0.12 mm
<FBS glass>
Max: 216 (W) x 356 (L) mm
—
8.5 (W) x 14.0 (L) inches
Min: No limit
Letter, Legal, Half-letter 80 sheets
Paper weight: 75.0 g/m2
<Transmission>
horizontal x vertical (in dots/inch x in lines/inch)
Normal:
203 x 98
Fine:
203 x 196
Super fine:
406 x 392* or 600 × 600
Grayscale:
203 x 196
*: In the case that the remote fax has the ability of “406 x 392” or “600 x 600”. If
not, the superfine resolution is “203 x 392”.
<Copy>
600 x 300 dpi (600 x 600 dpi for ultra fine)
<Scanner (Network)>
100 dpi : 100 dpi x 100 lpi (Color scan only)
200 dpi : 200 dpi x 200 lpi
300 dpi : 300 dpi x 300 lpi
600 dpi : 600 dpi x 600 lpi
208 mm (Fax), 216 mm (Copy)
Under 3 seconds (Super G3)
Based on transmission of ITU-T Test Document 1 to a Muratec fax
machine.
Standard : 7.8 MB (650 pages)
Upgrade option : plus 32MB (2720 pages)
(Total memory capacity: Backup time)
Standard 7.8 MB : 72 hours
Upgraded 39.8 MB :24 hours
The backup battery requires about 24 hours to reach full charge after
power to the fax unit is restored.
600 dpi
1-2
Item
Printing speed
MFX-2050/MFX-1450
F-565/F-525
MFX-2050 / F-565
MFX-1450 / F-525
Simplex printing
20 ppm
14 ppm
Duplex printing
10 ppm
8 ppm
(When loading Letter-sized paper from 1st paper cassette.)
Toner yield
Drum yield
Print margin
Acceptable recording
paper
Recording paper capacity
Receive paper tray
capacity
Printouts exit
Environmental conditions
Power requirements
Approx. 16,000 pages
Approx. 15,000 pages
(Letter, 6 % document coverage
(Letter, 4 % document coverage
under 2-pages interval printing.)
under 2-pages interval printing.)
Approx. 30,000 pages
Approx. 20,000 pages
(Letter under 2-pages interval
(Letter under 2-pages interval
printing.)
printing.)
Reading edge, Trailing edge, Left edge and Right edge:
0.12 ± 0.08 inch (3 ± 2 mm)
Simplex printing
<Paper cassette>
Plain paper : Letter(SEF), Legal(SEF), Half letter (LEF)
Paper weight: 60 – 90g/m2, 20 – 24 lb
<Bypass tray>
Plain paper:Letter(SEF), Legal(SEF), Half letter(LEF),
A4(SEF), A5(LEF)(SEF), A6(SEF), F4(SEF),
Executive(SEF)
Envelopes:
DL(SEF), COM10(SEF), Monarch(SEF)
Postcard:
3.9 inch (W) x 5.8 inch (L)(100 mm × 148 mm)
Transparency: Letter (SEF) or A4 (SEF)
Custom size: (3.8 – 8.5 inch) x (5.5 – 14 inch) (Width x
Length)
(97 – 216 mm) x (140 – 356 mm) (Width x Length)
Duplex printing
Paper Cassette:
Letter (SEF), Legal (SEF)
Bypass tray:
Letter (SEF), Legal (SEF), A4 (SEF), F4(SEF)
<Paper cassette>
1st cassette: 500 sheets
2nd cassette (option): 500 sheets
<Bypass tray>
Plain paper:
50 sheet
Postcard/Transparency: 20 sheets
Envelopes
1 sheet
Approx. 250 sheets
Face down
Ambient temperature: 10 °C to 32 °C (50 °F to 89.6 °F)
Relative humidity: 20 % to 80 % with no condensation
120 VAC ± 10% 50/60 Hz
* excluding projecting point115 VAC ± 10 %; 50/60 Hz
1-3
Item
Power
consumption
MFX-2050/MFX-1450
MFX-2050 / F-565
15 W
63 Wh
37 W
1030 W
1030 W
1040 W
Energy save mode
Standby
Memory Transmission
Reception
Copying
Maximum
Dimensions
F-565/F-525
MFX-1450 / F-525
15 W
50 Wh
36 W
1030 W
1030 W
1040 W
Standard:
520 x 490 x 446 mm (W x D x H)
20.5 x 19.3 x 17.6 inches (W x D x H)
With optional cassette: 520 x 490 x 566 mm (W x D x H)
20.5 x 19.3 x 22.3 inches (W x D x H)
120 mm
446 mm
490 mm
350 mm
* excluding projecting point
520 mm
520 mm
Weight
Optional
products
Duplex machine : Approx. 22.1 Kg
Duplex machine : Approx. 20.3 Kg
(48.7 lbs)
(44.8 lbs)
Simplex machine : Approx. 21.8 Kg
Simplex machine : Approx. 20.0 Kg
(48.1 lbs)
(44.1 lbs)
without consumables and trays.
without consumables and trays.
• Optional telephone handset
• Second paper cassette
• Upgrade memory
• PCL printer controller
• Mechanical page counter
• Second phone line kit
• Duplex print unit (Standard for MFX-2050 and F-565)
1-4
PC Print
PC-Fax Basic Function
Item
Configuration
Support for Local
Support for Network
Support for Print Server
Data Format
# of User
# of User Group
Interface
between Print Controller & MFP
between Network I/F & Print Controller
Data Transfer Protocol
・Salutation
・HTTP
・LPR
・Port9100
・Port9100 SNMP
・Port9100 PJL
・SMB
・AppleTalk
・IPP
・IPDS
Network Protocol
NetBEUI (Windows 95/98/Me)
NetBIOS (Windows 95/98/Me)
TCP/IP (Windows NT)
TCP/IP (UNIX)
IPX/SPX (Netware)
EtherTalk (Mac)
Status Monitor
DHCP Support
Network Management
SNMP-MIB
Specifications / Comments
Standard
yes, USB2.0 (Full Speed)
yes, 10/100Mbps (Auto Negotiation)
no
MMR
yes, 128MB:100 / 256MB or higher :200
yes, 128MB:100 / 256MB or higher :200
Image Output
Status
Command
EFI
: MMR
: EFI
: EFI
no
yes (with GDI)
yes (with PCL option)
yes (with PCL option)
yes (with PCL option)
yes (with PCL option)
no
no
no
no
no
no
yes
no
no
no
no
yes
yes
Print Language
Item
GDI
PCL5e
PCLxL
PJL Command
PS2
PS3
Specifications / Comments
yes (Standard)
yes (Option)
yes (Option)
yes
no
no
1-5
Print Capability (depends on the main unit)
Item
Color Printing
Color
Black & White
GDI Coding Method
Data Resolution
・600 x 600dpi
・400 x 400dpi
・300 x 300dpi
・200 x 200dpi
Print Resolution
Print Resolution
Grayscale
Print Speed (Simplex)
(Duplex)
Condition
FPOT (Simplex)
Condition
Print Alignment
Print Size
Simplex Printing
(Cassette)
(Optional Cassette)
(Bypass Tray)
Duplex Printing
(Cassette)
(Optional Cassette)
(Bypass Tray)
Print Margin
Paper Supply
Recording paper capacity (Standard)
(Max.)
Specifications / Comments
no
yes
MMR
yes (default)
no
yes
no
600 x 600 dpi
600 x 600 dpi
GDI: 144 levels
PCL: 256 levels
High: 20ppm / Low: 14ppm (Letter SEF)
High: 10ppm / Low: 8ppm (Letter SEF)
・Using Resident Font (in case of PCL)
・Picking Letter (SEF) paper from 1st cassette
・Original document (script.doc),
・Client PC (CPU 2.26GHz ,RAM: 256MB, HDD:
20GB
・Using OS: Windows XP
・Application software: MS Word2000
15.02 Seconds (Room Temp. 23°)
・Using Resident Font,
・Picking Letter (SEF) paper from 1st cassette
・Original document (script.doc),
・Client PC (CPU 2.26GHz ,RAM: 256MB, HDD:
20GB
・Using OS: Windows XP
・Application software: MS Word2000
Left Upper Corner
Letter(SEF), Legal(SEF), Half-Letter(LEF)
Letter(SEF), Legal(SEF), Half-Letter(LEF)
Letter(SEF), HalfLetter(LEF), Legal(SEF),
Executive(SEF), A6(SEF), A5(LEF),
A4(SEF), F4(SEF), DL(SEF), COM#10(SEF),
Monarch(SEF), Postcard(SEF),
Custom Size (width:3.82-8.50 inches,
length:5.51-14.01 inches)
(MFX2050/F565: Std, MFX1450/F525pm: Option)
Letter(SEF), Legal(SEF)
Letter(SEF), Legal(SEF)
Letter(SEF), Legal(SEF), A4(SEF), F4(SEF)
Top/Bottom: 3±2mm
Left/Right: 3±2mm
Cassettes + Bypass
500sheets(Cassette) + 50sheets(Bypass Tray)
500sheets x 2(Cassette) + 50sheets(Bypass Tray)
1-6
Print Job Operation
Item
Online Key
Job Display/Management Method
Job Monitoring
・Document Name
・Status
・User Name
・User Group Name
・Print Date
Job Cancel
Job Order Change
Print counter tabulation by user group
Print counter tabulation by user
Notice Function to Client PC
Item
Print Complete Notice
・Notice to the Client PC (IP Address)
・Notice to the User (User ID)
Specifications / Comments
yes (soft key on the Touch Screen)
Browser (GDI: yes, PCL: no)
yes (GDI: yes, PCL: no)
yes
no
yes (Windows user name)
no
yes
yes
no
yes (when “User Access/Cost Accounting” is ON)
yes (when “User Access/Cost Accounting” is ON)
Specifications / Comments
yes (InfoMonitor)
no
1-7
Printer Driver
Item
Paper Size Setting
(Simplex Printing)
(Duplex Printing)
Custom Paper Setting
・Size Edit
・Name
・Short Edge
・Long Edge
・Unit
Paper Supply Setting
Paper Madia Setting
Print Orientation (Portrait/Landscape)
# of Prints setting
Prior Print Setting
Sort Print
Reverse Order Print
Resolution
・600x600 dpi
・400x400 dpi
・300x300 dpi
・200x200 dpi
Toner Density
Toner Saving
Preset Enlarge/Reduction
1% zoom
Fit to Paper
Jammed Page re-print
Combine Print
・Print Separator Line
・Page Location
Repeat Print
Duplex Print
・Binding Position
・Binding Margin
・Booklet Print
・Booklet Binding Position
2-bin Tray Setting
Shift Sort
Staple
Punch
Forced Print (Ignore paper size error)
Watermarks
Standard message
・# of messages
Page initiate function
Specifications / Comments
yes
Letter(SEF), HalfLetter(LEF), Legal(SEF)
Executive(SEF), A6(SEF), A5(LEF)
A4(SEF), F4(SEF), DL(SEF), COM#10(SEF)
Monarch(SEF), Postcard(SEF)
Custom Size (width: 3.82-8.50 inches, length:
5.51-14.01 inches)
Letter(SEF), Legal(SEF), A4(SEF), F4(SEF)
Default: Letter (SEF)
yes
yes, 50 patterns
20 characters
3.82-8.5 inches
5.51-14.01 inches
mm / inch (Default: inch)
yes, Auto/Cassette1/Cassette2/Bypass Tray
yes
Plain, Pasteboard/Label, OHP, Envelope/Postcard
yes, (Default: Portrait)
yes (1-999 copies, Default: 1 copy)
no
yes, (Default: Off)
no
yes
no
yes
no
yes (-50 to 50, Default : 0)
yes, On/Off (Default: Off)
yes
yes, 25% - 400% (1% step)
yes
yes (controlled by main unit program)
yes(2-up/4-up/8-up)
yes
yes
(Left to Right /Right to Left/Up tp Down/Right, then
Down/Left, then Down/Down, then Right/Down,
then Left)
no
yes
yes, Upper/Left/Right
yes, Front : 0.00-1.18 inches Back : 0.00-1.18 inch
yes
Upper/Left/Right/Lower
no
no
no
no
no
GDI: no / PCL: yes (default: None)
yes
11 messages
yes
1st page only/All pages (Default: All pages)
1-8
Item
Specifications / Comments
Watermarks Edit
GDI: no / PCL: yes (default: None)
Watermarks List
yes
・# of programming message in Watermarks List 20 types (including 11 preset messages)
・Add Watermarks to List
yes
・Delete Watermarks from List
yes
Watermarks Edit function
yes
・# of characters for Title
30 characters
・# of characters of String
30 characters
・Shading
10%/25%/50%/75%/100% (Default: 25%)
・Style
Italic / Bold
・Font setting
yes
・Font type
Roman 80 fonts (Printer Regident Fonts)
・Font Size
10 - 144 points (Default : 72 points)
・Angle
Horizontal/Vertical/Diagonal/User set
Default: Diagonal
from -180° to 180° (Default: 52°)
・Position of Watermarks
Center / User Set
Horizontal: from -10 to 10
Vertical: from -10 to 10
Security Print
GDI: yes / PCL: no
128MB:50 / 256MB:100 /512MB:200
・# of Users
unlimited (due to memory capacity)
・# of stored jobs per user
N/A
・Box Name
User Password
・I.D.Code
24 hours (deleted after 24 hours without notice)
・Document Hold Period
no (all stored job will be printed together)
・Print Job Select
yes (all jobs will be deleted together)
・Print Job Delete
Attached option setting
yes
TrueType Mode
GDI: no / PCL: yes
Automatic
Download as Outline
Download as Bitmap
Download as Graphics (98/Me only)
Default : Automatic
Graphics Mode
no
Print Driver Installation Setting
yes
・P address direct setting
no
・SMB
no
・AppleTalk
no
・UPnP
no
・Rendezvous
yes
・Proprietary search (within same segment)
no
・Proprietary search (Outside segment)
Print Driver Display Language
English
Specification of client PC
PC/AT compatible machine
Support PC, WorkStation
Support OS
・Windows 95 (English) Ethernet Only
no
・Windows 98 (English) Ethernet Only
yes
・Windows 98SE (English)
yes
・Windows Me (English)
yes
・Windows NT4.0 (English) Ethernet Only
yes
・Windows 2000 Professional (English)
yes
・WindowsXP Home Edition/ Professional
yes
(English)
・Windows Server 2003 (English)
yes
・Windows Vista (English)
yes
1-9
Item
・DOS
・Mac
・Linux
・Unix
CPU
Required Memory quantity
Required Disk Space for Driver Installation
Others
HP PJL Support
Citrix
Microsoft Point and Print
WHQL Logo certified
(XP/2003)
Oracle
SAP
AS400
Specifications / Comments
no
no
no
no
Depends on the Operation System
Depends on the Operation System
10MB or higher
GDI: no / PCL: yes
no
no
GDI:no / PCL:yes
no
no
no
1-10
Printer Controller (PCL5e/XL)
Item
Emulation
Text Print
Printer Setting
Paper
・Paper Size
・Paper Type (Media)
・Paper Source
・Output Tray
・Orientation
・Copies
・Duplex
・Punch
・Staple
・Shit
Printer Setting
・Page Protection
・Toner Saving
・Auto Continue
Time-out setting
・I/O Time-Out setting
・Form Setting [Line/Pages]
・Resolution
PCL Font
・Font Type
・Font Pitch
・Font Size
・Symbol Set
Test Print
・Demo Page
・Printer Configuration
・Font List
Printer Resident Font
Specifications / Comments
TBD
Yes (Only Network Connection, Local Connection
is not supported.)
Yes (by Service Mode (Machine Parameter Setting)
Yes
Letter, HalfLetter, Legal, Executive, A6, A5, A4,
F4, DL, COM#10, Monarch, Postcard
(Default: A4)
Yes
Plain, Pasteboard/Label, OHP, Envelope/Postcard
(Default: Plain)
yes
Auto/Cassette1/Cassette2/Bypass Tray
(Default: Auto)
no
yes
Portrait/Landscape
(Default: Portrait)
yes
1-999
(Default: 1)
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
yes
(Default: 300 sec.)
no
yes
(Default: 600dpi)
yes
(Default: Mincho))
Yes
(Defalt: 10.0)
yes
(Default: 12.0)
yes
(Default: Windows 3.1j Latin)
no
no
no
yes
Roman 80 fonts
1-11
Local Print Function
Item
Print On Demand
File Format
TIFF-S/F
PDF
Protocol
Available Function
Copy
Sort
Cassette Selection
Print OB Document
Select document to print
File Format
Available Function
Copy
Sort
Cassette Selection
Specifications / Comments
yes
yes (created by machine itself)
SMB Client
yes (1-99)
yes
yes
yes, from User Box / Bulletin Board
no
yes (1-99)
yes
yes
1-12
PC-Fax
PC-Fax Basic Function
Item
Configuration
Network Interface
Communication Protocol
Data Format
# of User
# of User Group
Communication Capability
Item
Document Size
Coding Method
Communication Standard
Transmission Speed
Resolution
・8 dpm x 3.85 lpm (200x100 dpi)
・8 dpm x 7.7 lpm (200x200 dpi)
・16 dpm x 15.4 lpm (400x400 dpi)
・600 x 600 dpi
Halftone (Fax Driver)
Specifications / Comments
Standard
yes10/100Mbps(Auto Negotiation)
HTTP
TIFF-S, TIFF-F
yes, 128MB:50 / 256MB:100 /512MB:200
yes, 128MB:50 / 256MB:100 /512MB:200
Specifications / Comments
A3/B4/A4
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
V.34
Max. 33.6Kbps
no
yes
yes
yes
256 levels (Dither Matrix)
8 dpm x 7.7 lpm(200 x 200 dpi)
1-13
Transmission Function
Item
Direct Tx from applications
Tx by Client User
Tx command file
# of Tx reservation command
Broadcast Tx
Max. # of destinations
Group Tx
Max. # of group
Fax/E-mail mixed Tx
Salutation Fax Tx
Destination specifying method
Multi Line
# of Lines
PC-Fax Tx Details
Tx dialog method
Destination specifying method
・Direct Input
・Select by Address Book
・Select by LDAP search
Operation for the Tx document
Document select from User box
Document select from network folder
・SMB protocol (Windows)
・NFS(Linux)
・AppleTalk(Mac)
Tx Document Preview
CoverPage Edit
Tx to User
Delete document after Tx
Tx Priority Setting
Communication Options
・F-Code Tx (ITU-T)
ITU-T SubAddress
ITU-T Password
・Delayed Tx
Max Delayed Time
・TTI Select
・Tx Line Select
Specifications / Comments
yes (with Fax Driver)
yes (Browser)
CF
100 commands
yes
128MB: 1030 (AddressBook+Direct Input)
256MB: 1530 (AddressBook+Direct Input)
512MB: 2030 (AddressBook+Direct Input)
yes
128MB: 100
256MB: 150
512MB: 200
yes
no
no
yes
2
Browser
yes (max. 30)
yes (1000 / max. 2000 with 512MB CF)
yes (Max.30)
Add/Delete/Order Change
yes
no
no
no
no
yes
yes
yes (with Fax or I-Fax Tx)
yes (network documents cannnot be deleted.)
no
yes
20 characters (0-9, #, *)
20 characters (0-9, #, *)
yes
31 days
yes
yes
1-14
Reception Function
Item
Received Fax Routing
Routing Table
All Received Fax
Routing Conditions
TSI
・TSI Partial Match (ex. 075*)
・TSI Multiple Match (OR)
CallerID
・CallerID Partial Match (ex. 001*)
・CallerID Multiple Match (OR)
Number Display
Specifications / Comments
yes, only from browser
・ND Partial Match (ex. 075*)
・ND Multiple Match (OR)
ITU-T Subaddress/Password
・Sub-Address Multiple Match (OR)
Select from Address Book
Rx Line
And/OR setting of routing conditions
Routing Destination
User
・# of User
N/A
N/A
yes
no
no
yes
yes
・# of User Group
Fax
・Select by Address Book
・Direct Input
・Select by LDAP search
E-mail
・Select by Address Book
・Direct Input
・Select by LDAP search
・Attached File Format
Network Folder
・Select from Short-cut
・Direct Input
・Routing Protocol
SMB (Windows)
NFS (Linux)
AppleShare (Mac)
FTP
・Direct Input
・Select from Short-cut
yes
yes, # of tables: 100
yes
yes (forward match)
yes, 25 characters x 5
yes
yes (forward match)
25 characters x 5
no
128MB: 50 / 256MB:100 / 512MB:200
(when multiple accesses are executed at the same
time, the access speed may down.)
128MB: 50 / 256MB:100 / 512MB:200
(when multiple accesses are executed at the same
time, the access speed may down.)
yes
40 characters x 30
yes (Max. 30)
yes
50 characters x 30
yes (Max. 30)
TIFF-S/TIFF-F/PDF
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
1-15
Item
Enhanced Routing Destinations (exclusive setting)
Shard Rx Box
Bulletin Board
・Sender
・Doc. Info.
・Subject
・Comments
・Posting Time
Circulation
・Sender
・Receiver
・Doc. Info.
・Subject
・Comments
・Hold Time
Processing
・Sender
・Receiver
・Doc. Info.
・Subject
・Comments
・Deadline
Setting for Routing setting activate period
・Start Time (Mon/Day, day of week, Time)
・End Time (Mon/Day, day of week, Time)
・Repeat Setting
Routing and Print
Routing setting from MFP Control Panel
Forced Print of distributed documents
Suspend of distribution (by record)
Suspend of distribution (All records)
Exceptional Distribution
Notice function to Client PC
Item
Tx completion Notice
Rx Notice (to Recipient)
Rx Notice (to Sender)
Delivery Notice (to Sender)
Specifications / Comments
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
no (included in the regular routing record)
Specifications / Comments
yes (InfoMonitor)
yes (InfoMonitor)
no
no
1-16
Cover Page
Item
CoverPage Tx
CoverPage Templete
Stored location of CoverPage
# of Templates
Edit CoverPage
Insert Title
Insert Message
Insert Destination Information
Insert Sender's Information
Sender's Information
Name
Company Name
Department Name
Zip Code
Address 1
Address 2
Mail Address
Tel
Fax
Sub-Address
Password
Salutation ID
Specifications / Comments
yes
Shared
in OB board/Client PC
5 types/128MB
10 types/256MB
20 types/512MB
yes (with CoverPage Editor)
yes, 80 characters
yes, 1024 characters
yes
yes
yes (using User Info)
yes (using User Info)
no
no
no
no
yes (using User Info)
no
yes (using User Info)
no
no
no
Communication Log
Item
Communication Log control
Communication Log display
Items on the Communication Log
・Destinations
・# of Pages
・Communication Mode
・Airtime of Communication
・Executed Time/Date
・User
・Result
・Details
Error Details
・E-mail Tx Log
・E-mail Rx Log
・Fax Tx Log
Server Response
Broadcast Destinations
Tx Confirmation Detail
Communication Log auto print
Communication Log manual print
Tabulation of Comm. Log by user group
Tabulation of Comm. Log by user
Storage of past Comm. Log
File download of Comm. Log
Auto e-mail sending of Comm. Log
Specifications / Comments
Shared with the main unit's log
yes (Control panel/Browser)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Tx Complete / Tx Failed / Tx in Process / Tx Cancelled
Rx Completed / Forward Denied / Rx Railed / Connect Failed / Server not Found / Auth Failed
Completed / Waiting / In Process / Waiting for set
time / Cancelled / Terminated Forcibly / Error
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes (Control panel/Browser)
no
no
yes, by Archiving Function
yes, only CSV format
no
1-17
Communication Job Control
Item
Tx Job Display (initiated at main unit)
PC-Fax Job Display
Job display by user
Job Cancel (initiated at main unit)
PC-Fax Job Cancel (by job)
PC-Fax Job Cancel (by destination)
Job order change
Specifications / Comments
yes (Control panel/Browser)
yes (Control panel/Browser)
yes (Browser)
yes (Control panel/Browser)
yes (Control panel/Browser)
yes (Control panel/Browser)
no
Fax Driver
Item
Specifications / Comments
Fax Driver
Document size
A3, B4, A4, A5, B5, A6, F4, Post Card, Letter,
H-Letter, Legal, Ledger, Executive, DL, COM10,
Monarch
yes (X / Y)
yes (50-200%)
yes
A3, B4, A4, A5, B5, A6, F4,Post Card, Letter,
H-Letter, Legal, Ledger, Executive, DL, COM10,
Monarch
yes
Document Orientation
Zoom
Paper size specification
・paper size
・Fit to Page
Resolution
・8 dpm × 3.85 lpm (200x100 dpi
・8 dpm × 7.7 lpm (200x200 dpi
・16 dpm × 15.4 lpm (400x400 dpi
・600x600 dpi
Coding Method
Halftone (Fax Driver)
no
yes
yes
yes
MMR
144 Levels (Dither Matrix)
8 dpm x 7.7 lpm (200 x 200 dpi)
yes: TiffMaker
Print to File on the local folder
Fax Driver OS support
・Windows 95 (English)
・Windows 98 (English version)
・Windows 98 SE (English)
・Windows Me (English)
・Windows NT 4.0 (English)
・Windows 2000 Professional (English)
・Windows XP Home Edition/Proffesional
(English)
・Windows Server 2003 (English)
・Windows Vista (English)
・MacOS
・Linux
・UNIX
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
no
no
no
Report
Item
PC-Fax Tx Check Message
・Tx Job Info. (Destination/Day&Time/Result…)
・Tx Document Attach
PC-Fax TCR List Print
・Tx Job Info. (Destination/Day&Time/Result…)
・Tx Document Attach (100%/Reduced)
Rx Document Routing Error Report
Specifications / Comments
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no (The distributed document itself will be printed
out)
1-18
Network Scan, Scan to E-mail
Network Scan Basic Function
Item
Configuration
Support for Network
Data Transfer Protocol
Data Format
# of User
# of User Group
Specification of client PC
Support PC, WorkStation
Support OS
・Windows 95 (English)
・Windows 98 (English version)
・Windows 98 SE (English version)
・Windows Me (English version)
・Windows NT 4.0 (English version)
・Windows 2000 Professional (English)
・Windows XP Home Edition / Professional
(English)
・Windows Server 2003 (English)
・Windows Vista (English)
・MacOS
・Linux
・UNIX
CPU
Required Memory quantity
Required Disk Space for Driver Installation
Specifications / Comments
Standard
yes10/100Mbps(Auto Negotiation)
SMB/FTP/SMTP
TIFF/PDF/JPEG
yes, 128MB:50 / 256MB:100 /512MB:200
yes, 128MB:50 / 256MB:100 /512MB:200
PC/AT compatible machine
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
no
no
no
Depends on the Operation System
Depends on the Operation System
10MB or higher
1-19
Scan Capability (depends on the main unit)
Item
Scan Starting
B/W Scan
Color Scan
Coding Method
・MH
・MR
・MMR
・JBIG
・JPEG
・BMP
・PNG
・Exif
・RGB
Resolution (Color)
・600 x 600 dpi
・400 x 400 dpi
・300 x 300 dpi
・200 x 200 dpi
・100 x 100 dpi
Resolution (B/W)
・600 x 600 dpi
・400 x 400 dpi
・300 x 300 dpi
・200 x 200 dpi
Halftone
Scanning Speed (Color)
- 600 dpi
- 400 dpi
- 300 dpi
- 200 dpi
- 100 dpi
Scanning Speed (B/W)
- 600 dpi
- 400 dpi (ITU-T #1 chart)
- 300 dpi (ITU-T #1 chart)
- 200 dpi (ITU-T #1 chart)
Preset Enlarge/Reduction
1% zoom
1% zoom
Document Type
Effective Scanning Width
・A4 / Letter
・B4
・A3 / Ledger
Scan Size
Contrast
・Auto
・Manual
・Background color correction
Specifications / Comments
Control Panel
yes
yes
no
no
yes (B/W)
no
yes (Color)
no
no
no
no
yes
no
yes
yes
yes (default)
yes
no
yes
yes (default)
256 levels (Error Diffusion)
(available in Scan to E-mail/Folder/FTP)
112.37 sec/page (Letter(SEF))
N/A
34.74 sec/page (Letter(SEF))
12.85 sec/page (Letter(SEF))
7.84 sec/page (Letter(SEF))
ADF:7.6 sec/page, FBS:7.0 sec.page (Letter(SEF))
N/A
ADF:5.1 sec/page, FBS:4.1 sec.page (Letter(SEF))
ADF:4.1 sec/page, FBS:3.1 sec.page (Letter(SEF))
yes(Black&White Only)
yes, MFP:50% - 200% (1% step), PPF:50% 100% (1% step)
yes, MFP:75% - 200% (1% step), PPF:75% 100% (1% step)
Auto/Text&Photo/Photo/Background (B/W)
216 mm (Letter)
no
no
Letter, Legal, H-Letter
no
yes (5 levels) (Black&White Only)
no
1-20
Data Transfer Method
Item
Color Scan
・TWAIN
・HTTP Download (of User Document)
・Scan to Folder
・Scan to FTP
・Scan to E-mail
・Scan to User
・WIA (Windows Image Acquisition) WinMe/XP
B/W Scan
・TWAIN
・HTTP Download (of User Document)
・Scan to Folder
・Scan to FTP
・Scan to E-mail
・Scan to User
・WIA (Windows Image Acquisition) WinMe/XP
Specifications / Comments
no (available only in local connection)
no
yes(PDF/JPEG)
yes(PDF/JPEG)
yes(PDF/JPEG)
no
no
no
yes
yes(TIFF/PDF)
yes(TIFF/PDF)
yes(TIFF/PDF)
yes(TIFF/PDF)
no
1-21
Scan Advanced Functions
Item
Scan specified area
Scan Document Preview
Duplex Scan
Manual Duplex Scan
Batch Scan
・ON (1 stuck -> 1 file)
・OFF(1 page -> 1 file)
・Sheet Mode (1 sheet -> 1 file)
Destinations
・Scan to E-mail
・Scan to Folder
・Scan to FTP
・Scan to OB User
・Scan to Bulletin Board
・Scan to Circulation
・Scan to Processing
Broadcast
Fax&Copy&Scan
E-mail Edit (Scan to E-mail)
・Subject
・Text
・Select from Templates
File Name Setting
(Scan to E-mail/Folder/FTP)
・Auto
・Manual
・Select
Attachment Files
(Scan to E-mail/Folder/FTP)
・# of Attachments
・Means of attachment
Category Setting (Scan to Bulletin Board)
・Manual
・Select
Subject Setting (Scan to Bulletin Board)
Post Time Setting (Scan to Bulletin Board)
Comments Setting (Scan to Bulletin Board)
Hold Time Setting (Scan to Circulation)
Deadline Setting (Scan to Processing)
Scan counter tabulation by user group
Scan counter tabulation by user
Specifications / Comments
no
no
no
yes
yes (default)
yes
no
Select from AddressBook
Direct address input
Select from E-mail history
LDAP search
Select from Folder Shortcut
Browse
(max. 5 destinations at 1 job)
Select from FTP Shortcut
Direct link input
(max. 5 destinations at 1 job)
Select from OB Users
yes
no
no
yes
(not available to broadcast to FTP destinations
with E-mail, Folder or User)
no
yes, up to 80 characters
yes, up to 1024 characters
yes (# of templates: 10)
yes, YYYYMMDDHHMMSS
yes, up to 100 characters
yes (# of prefixed name: 10)
yes
max. 10
Browse
Select from Folder Shortcut
yes, up to 20 characters
yes (# of prefixed type: 10)
yes, 80 characters
yes, 1-99 days
yes, 1024 characters
no
no
yes
yes
1-22
Item
Scan to Print Function
Method
・Agent S/W
・DPS (PictBridge)
・PCL/PS
Recommended Printer
- Printer Shortcut Registration
Scan Settings
- # of copies
- Resolution
- Scan Size
- Zoom
- Sort
Notice Function to Client PC
Item
Scan to User Complete Notice
Scanned Doc. to User Auto Download Notice
Specifications / Comments
yes
yes (Scan to Print Monitor)
no
no
5
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
Specifications / Comments
yes (InfoMonitor)
yes (Download Manager)
1-23
Internet Fax
I-Fax Basic Function
Item
Configuration
Support for Network
Data Format
# of User
# of User Group
Transmission Protocol
Reception Protocol
Transfer Speed
Encoding
Document Size
Communication Standard
・Simple Mode
・Full Mode
Multi Account
Resolution
Coding Method
・MH
・MR
・MMR
・JBIG
・JPEG
File Format
TIFF-FX Support
・Profile-S(A4/MH/200dpi)
・Profile-F(A3/MMR/600dpi)
・Profile-J(A3/JBIG/600dpi)
・Profile-C(A3/JPEG/600dpi)
PDF Support
・Image base (BW MMR)
・Image base (C JPEG)
・Character Base
Specifications / Comments
Standard
yes10/100Mbps(Auto Negotiation)
MMR
yes, 128MB:50 / 256MB:100 /512MB:200
yes, 128MB:50 / 256MB:100 /512MB:200
SMTP/ESMTP
SMTP/POP3
Max. 100Mbps
MIME/Base64
A3/B4/A4 (only A4 from the main unit)
ITU-T T.37
yes
yes
no
8dpm x 3.85lpm (200 x 100 dpi)
8dpm x 7.7lpm (200 x 200 dpi)
16dpm x 15.4lpm (400 x 400 dpi)
600 x 600 dpi
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
no
no
1-24
I-Fax Transmission Function
Item
Tx from Application
Tx of OB Documents after log-in
I-Fax Tx Command File
# of Tx Reservation
Broadcast
・Max # of broadcasting destinations
One-Time Broadcast Tx
Group Tx
・# of Groups
Security Tx
・S/MIME
・PGP/MIME
E-mail to Fax relay initiation Tx
Original Method (Fax=XXX@XXX)
Proprietary method initiation
E-mail Gateway Function
- Lightning Fax
- RightFax
- Dialing Options Convert
Direct SMTP Tx / Enter the IP address
Dynamic DNS Support
SIP Support
Re-rout Tx
Fax/E-mail mixed Tx
Duplex Scan
Manual Duplex Scan
Batch Scan
・ON (1 stuck -> 1 file)
・OFF(1 page -> 1 file)
・Sheet Mode (1 sheet -> 1 file)
E-mail resend
SMTP Authentication
Authentication Format
I-Fax Tx Details (by Tx dialog)
Tx Dialog Method
Destination specifying method
・Direct Input
・Select by Address Book
・Select by LDAP search
・Select from CSV file
Select To/Cc/Bcc
Operation for the Tx Document
Attached File Format
Document select from User box
Document select from network folder
・Attachment file size limitation
・Attachment file page limitation
・SMB protocol (Windows)
・NFS(Linux)
・AppleTalk(Mac)
Specifications / Comments
yes (with Fax Driver)
yes
Shared with the main unit command
100
yes
128MB: 1030 (AddressBook+Direct Input)
256MB: 1530 (AddressBook+Direct Input)
512MB: 2030 (AddressBook+Direct Input)
no
yes
128MB: 100
256MB: 150
512MB: 200
no
no
no
no
yes (Body text manual edit)
yes (prefix: yes / suffix: yes)
yes
yes
yes, Pause/Tone/Flash (service mode)
yes
no
no
no
yes
no
no
yes (default)
yes
no
yes
yes
LOGIN, PLAIN, CRAM-MD5
Browser
yes (max. 30)
yes (1000 / max. 2000 with 512MB CF)
yes (Max. 30)
no
yes
Add/Delete/Order Change
PDF/TIFF-S/TIFF-F
yes
no
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1-25
Item
Tx Document Preview
CoverPage Edit
Tx to User
Delete document after Tx
Tx Priority Setting
Communication Options
Reply-to mail address edit
・Use e-mail address of user info
・Address preset
・Select from registered addresses
E-mail Template select (Subject/Body text)
E-mail subject edit
E-mail body text edit
Add signature
・Direct Input
・Select from registered signatures
Delayed Tx
・Max Delayed Period
DSN setting
・ON/OFF setting by job
MDN setting
・ON/OFF setting by job
・MDN waiting period setting
I-Fax Tx Details (by Control Panel)
Tx with Log-in (same method as I-Fax)
Destination specifying method
・Direct Input
・Select by Address Book
・Select by LDAP search
・Select from CSV file
To/Cc/Bcc Select
Operation for the selected documents
Document select from User box
Document select from network folder
・Attachment file size limitation
・Attachment file page limitation
・SMB protocol (Windows)
・NFS Linux)
・AppleTalk (Mac)
Auto divided Tx
・by page
・by arbitrary pages
・by amount of data
Quick Tx
(send each page concurrently with scanning)
Tx Document Preview
CoverPage Edit
Tx to User
Delete document after Tx
Tx Priority Setting
Communication Options
Reply-to mail address edit
・Use e-mail address of user info
・Direct Input
・Select from registered addresses
・Address preset
Specifications / Comments
yes
yes
yes (with Fax or I-Fax Tx)
yes (network documents cannot be deleted.)
no
no
N/A
N/A
N/A
yes
80 characters
1024 characters
no
no
no
yes
31 days
yes
no
yes
no
24 hours (possible to change in Service Mode)
yes
yes (max. 30)
yes (1000 / max. 2000 with 512MB)
yes (Max. 30)
no
yes
no
no
no
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
yes
no
no
yes, 1 address
1-26
Item
E-mail template select (Subject/Body text)
E-mail subject edit
E-mail body text edit
Add signature
・Direct Input
・Select from registered signatures
Delayed Tx
・Max Delayed Period
DSN setting
・ON/OFF setting by job
MDN setting
・ON/OFF setting by job
・MDN waiting period setting
Specifications / Comments
yes
yes
yes
no
N/A
N/A
yes
31 days
no
N/A
no
N/A
N/A
1-27
I-Fax Reception Function
Item
Text mail Reception
・Japanese
・English
・Other Languages
・Print Font
Reception of E-mail with attachment
TIFF-FX
・Profile-S
・Profile-F
・Profile-J
・Profile-C
PDF
・Muratec Proprietary
# of Out-of-paper Reception
POP3 Reception
POP Server Interval
Auto Reception/Auto Print
Auto Reception/Manual Print
Received E-mail Auto Erase
Manual Reception
Receive Divided E-mail
APOP Authentication
Action when Error E-mail is arrived
Specifications / Comments
no
yes
yes: Latin1, Latin9
Bitmap Font, 26dot
yes
yes
yes
no
yes (only the Muratec Proprietary format)
depends on the CF capacity
SMTP Reception
ESMTP Support
Access Limitation
Multiplex Communication
Received E-mail Routing Setting
Routing Table
All Received E-mail
Routing Conditions
Sender's e-mail address
・User Name (ex: XXX@)
・Domain Name (ex: @XXX)
・E-mail address
(ex: XXX@XXX)
・Multiple Conditions (OR)
Subject
・Search by Designated characters
・Multiple setting of characters (AND/OR)
And/OR setting of routing conditions
Routing Destination
User
・# of User
・# of User Group
Fax
・Select by Address Book
・Direct Input
・Select by LDAP search
5 sec. - 99 hours 59 min. 59 sec. (1sec.step)
yes
yes (by routing setting)
yes
yes
no
yes
Send Report/E-mail Return/Forward to preset
e-mail address (default: Send Report)
yes
no
yes
yes
yes, # of tables: 100
yes
yes
no
yes (rearward match: *muratec.com)
yes (complete match)
50 characters x 5
yes
no
yes
128MB: 50/256MB:100/512MB: 200
128MB: 50/256MB:100/512MB: 200
yes
40 characters x 30 destinations
yes (Max. 30)
1-28
Item
Specifications / Comments
Mail
・Select by Address Book
・Direct Input
・Select by LDAP search
・File Format
Network Folder
・Select from Short-cut
・Direct Input
・Routing Protocol
SMB (Windows)
NFS (Linux)
AppleShare (Mac)
FTP
・Direct Input
・Select from Short-cut
Enhanced Routing Destinations (exclusive setting)
Shard Rx Box
Bulletin Board
・Sender
・Doc. Info.
・Subject
・Comments
・Posting Time
Circulation
Processing
Setting for Routing setting activate period
・Start Time (Mon/Day, day of week, Time)
・End Time (Mon/Day, day of week, Time)
・Repeat Setting
Routing and Print
Routing setting from MFP Control Panel
Forced Print of distributed Documents
Suspend of distribution (by record)
Suspend of distribution (All records)
Exceptional Distribution
Notice Function to Client PC
Item
Tx completion Notice
Rx Notice (to Recipient)
Rx Notice (to Sender)
Delivery Notice (to Sender)
yes
50 characters x 30 destinations
yes (Max. 30)
TIFF-S/TIFF-F/PDF
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
no (included in the regular routing record)
Specifications / Comments
yes (InfoMonitor)
yes (InfoMonitor)
no
no
1-29
Cover Page
Item
CoverPage Tx
CoverPage Template
Stored location of CoverPage
# of Templates
Edit CoverPage
Insert Title
Insert Message
Insert Destination Information
Insert Sender's Information
Sender's Information
Name
Company Name
Department Name
Zip Code
Address 1
Address 2
Mail Address
Tel
Fax
Sub-Address
Password
Salutation ID
Specifications / Comments
yes
Shared
in OB board/Client PC
5 types/128MB
10 types/256MB
20 types/512MB
yes (with CoverPage Editor)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes (using User Info)
yes (using User Info)
no
no
no
no
yes (using User Info)
no
yes (using User Info)
no
no
no
Communication Log
Item
Communication Log control
Items on the Communication Log
・Destination Address
・# of Pages
・Communication Mode
・Communication Period
・Date&Time
・Result
・Detailed Information
Details of Error
Server Response
All addresses of broadcasting
Details of Tx Confirmation
Communication Log display
Communication Log auto print
Communication Log manual print
Tabulation of Comm. Log by user group
Tabulation of Comm. Log by user
Storage of past communications
File download of Comm. Log
Auto e-mail sending of Comm. Log
Specifications / Comments
Shared with the main unit's log
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes (Control panel/Browser)
yes (Control panel/Browser)
yes (Control panel/Browser)
no
no
yes, by Archiving Function
yes, only CSV format
no
1-30
Communication Job Control
Item
Tx Job Display (initiated at main unit)
I-Fax Job Display
Job display by user
Job Cancel (initiated at main unit)
I-Fax Job Cancel (by job)
I-Fax Job Cancel (by destination)
Job order change
Specifications / Comments
yes (Control panel/Browser)
yes (Control panel/Browser)
yes (Browser)
yes (Control panel/Browser)
yes (Control panel/Browser)
no
no
Report
Item
Tx Error Message
・Error Details
・Description of Server Response
・Tx Image Attach
MDN/DSN List Print
・Print Language Select
・Format Select
・Notice when the waiting time is exceeded
TCR List Print
・Tx Job Info. (Destination/Day&Time/Result…)
・Tx Document Attach (100%/Reduced)
Rx Document Routing Error Report
Specifications / Comments
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no (depends on the LCD Language)
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
no (The distributed document itself will be printed
out)
E-mail API
Item
E-mail Command
HTML Form
・Retrieve HTML Form
Machine Setting by E-mail
Job Control (Initial/Cancel/Result Notice)
Report by E-mail
・TCR
・Service report
・Call service error
・Consumable order sheet
・Communication Log
・Error Report
・Job Complete Notice
・Life Monitor
・Machine Settings
Reminder
Specifications / Comments
no
no
no
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
1-31
Network OfficeBridge Settings
Address Book Setting
Item
Address Book
Stored Location
# of Address
Reference/Edit Method
Personal Address Book
Shared Address Book
Items for registration
・Destination Name
・Kana readings of destination name
・Title of destination name
・Company Name
・Kana readings of company name
・Title of company name
・Department Name
・ZIP Code
・Address
・TEL
・Fax
・Sub-Address
・Password
・E-mail Address
Address Book Import/Export
・CSV
・vCard
・LDAP
・RDS
Address Book List Print
Group
・# of Groups
・Group Name Registration
・Personal Group
・Shared Group
Group List Print
Specifications / Comments
yes
CF
1000 (128MB)
1500 (256MB)
2000 (512MB)
yes (Control Panel/Browser)
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
yes
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes, Control Panel/Browser
100(128MB) / 150(256MB) / 200 (512MB)
yes
yes
yes
yes
1-32
OB User Information Setting
Item
Display/Setting Method
User Information Operation
・New Registration
・Edit
・Delete
・Forced Delete
・Import/Export
・CSV Format
・vCard Format
Registered User List Display
・User Log-in Status Display
・User's Unread Document Display
User Information Item
・User Name
・User ID
・Password
・Type (Gateway User)
・Company
・Department Name (User Group Name)
・TEL
・Fax
・E-mail Address
Set to the Reply-To address or not
・Login Icon
・LDAP Server Login
・Personal Available Address
・Shared/Personal Default Settings
・IP Address of Client PC
・PC Name
・Administrator Authority
・List Print
・Home Directory
Specifications / Comments
Browser
yes (only for Admin.)
yes (Admin can edit all users' data, but user can
edit only his own data.)
yes (only for Admin.)
yes (only for Admin.)
yes (only for Admin.)
yes
yes (Name/CompanyFax/E-mail)
yes
yes (New document arrival)
30 characters
no (no ID Setting)
20 characters
no
50 characters
100 characters
40 digits
40 digits
50 characters
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
N/A
no
yes (Note: the box that has the new arrival document is given the first priority)
1-33
Device Setting
Item
Display/Operation Method
Machine Information (R/W)
・Machine Name
・Installation Location
・Option Configuration
Machine Status
・Network Connection
・Line
・Scanner
・Printer
・Paper Supply (Each Cassette)
・Output Device (Duplex/2-bin/Shift)
・Finisher (Staple/Punch)
Counter Confirmation
・Print Total Count
・Copy
・Fax/List
・PC Print
・Scan Total Count
・Copy
・Fax/List
・PC Print
Initialize
Specifications / Comments
Browser
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes (Duplex only)
N/A
yes (only Admin.)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes, for Machine Information (only Admin.)
Fax Communication Job
Item
Tx Job Display (initiated at main unit)
PC-Fax Job Display
Job display by user
Fax Job Cancel (by job)
Fax Job Cancel (by destination)
PC-Fax Job Cancel (by job)
PC-Fax Job Cancel (by destination)
Job order change
Specifications / Comments
yes (Control panel/Browser)
yes (Control panel/Browser)
yes (Browser, in Personal Outbox Tab)
yes (Control panel/Browser)
yes (Control panel)
yes (Control panel/Browser)
yes (Control panel)
no
E-mail Communication Job
Item
Tx Job Display (initiated at main unit)
PC-IFax Job Display
Job display by user
Job Cancel (by job, initiated at main unit)
Job Cancel (by destination, initiated at main unit)
PC-IFax Job Cancel (by job)
PC-IFax Job Cancel (by destination)
Job order change
Specifications / Comments
yes (Control panel/Browser)
yes (Control panel/Browser)
yes (Browser, in Personal Outbox Tab)
yes (Control panel/Browser)
no
yes (Control panel/Browser)
no
no
1-34
Print Job
Item
Job Display/Operation Method
Job Details Display
・Document Name
・Status
・User Name
・User Group Name
・Progress
・Print Time
Job Cancel
Job order change
Tabulation of Print Counter by user group
Tabulation of Print Counter by user
Fax Communication Log
Item
Fax Communication Log Display
# of Log
Items on the Communication Log
・Destination
・# of Pages
・Comm. Mode
・Comm. Time
・Date&Time
・Result
・Details
Error Code
Broadcast Locations
Comm. Log Auto Print
Comm. Log Manual Print
Tabulation of Comm. Log by user group
Tabulation of Comm. Log by user
Storage of communications
Download of Stored Comm. Log
Specifications / Comments
yes (Browser)
(Note) The security print job can be viewed only by
the initiated user.
yes
yes
no
yes (Windows User Name)
no
yes
yes
yes (Control panel/Browser)
Available only for the jobs in the Is memory.
no
yes, in User Access & Control screen
yes, in User Access & Control screen
Specifications / Comments
yes (Control panel/Browser)
Latest 100 communications (Tx + Rx)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes (Control panel)
yes (Control panel/Browser)
no
no
yes, by Archiving Settings (to folder).
(Note) Comm. Result cannot be stored in the Archiving Function.
yes, CSV format
1-35
E-mail Communication Log
Item
E-mail Communication Log Display
# of Log
Items on the Communication Log
・Destination Address
・# of Pages
・Comm. Mode
・Comm. Time
・Date&Time
・Result
・Details
Error Details
Server Response
Broadcast Locations
Tx Conformation
Comm. Log Auto Print
Comm. Log Manual Print
Tabulation of Comm. Log by user group
Tabulation of Comm. Log by user
Storage of past communications
Download of Stored Comm. Log
User Access/Cost Accounting (only Admin.)
Item
Display Method
・Sort by User Index
・Sort by Group
Items on the list
・Index
・Group
・User Name
・Fax Transmission Time
・Fax Tx # of Pages
・Fax Charge
・Copy # of Pages
・Copy Charge
・Scan # of Pages
・Scan Charge
・PC Print # of Pages
・PC Print Charge
List Print
・Total
・Group Unit
・User Unit
Data Download
Data Clear
Report Function
・E-mail Report of Total list
・E-mail Report by Group unit
・E-mail Report by User unit
Specifications / Comments
yes (Control panel/Browser)
Latest 100 communications (Tx:50. Rx:50)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes (Control panel)
yes (Control panel/Browser)
no
no
yes, by Archiving Settings (to folder).
(Note) Comm. Result cannot be stored in the Archiving Function.
yes, CSV format
Specifications / Comments
Browser (only Admin.)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes, CSV format
yes
no
no
no
1-36
TCP/IP Settings (only Admin.)
Item
Setting Method
TCP/IP Setting
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
DNS Server Address
・DNS Suffix
DHCP Setting (ON/OFF)
Network Environment Initialize
MAC Address Display
PING
SMB Setting
NetBIOS
Workgroup
WINS
HTTP Port No. Change
Client Port No. Change
InfoMonitor Port No. Change
Scan to Print Monitor
Network Setting Code (only Admin.)
Item
Read/Write Code
Read Only Code
Backdoor Password
Specifications / Comments
yes (Control panel/Browser)
yes
yes
yes (max. 2 addresses)
yes (max. 2 addresses)
yes (50 characters)
yes, renew command is supported
yes (Browser)
yes (Control panel)
yes (Control panel)
yes
yes
yes (max. 2 addresses)
yes
yes
yes
yes
Specifications / Comments
yes, 4 digits
yes, 4 digits
yes, embedded 7 digits
SMPT/POP Settings (only Admin.)
Item
Specifications / Comments
Setting Method
Browser
Machine E-mail Address
yes
Machine Name
yes
Reply-to Address
yes
SMTP Server Setting
50 characters
・Mail Server Address/Domain Name
no
・Substitute Tx Mail Server
1-65535
・SMTP Port Number
yes
・Main Retrieve before Tx
yes, LOGIN / PLAIN / CRAM-MD5
・SMTP Authentication
yes
- SMTP Auth Account
yes
- SMTP Auth Password
POP3 Server Setting
yes
・POP Server Address/Domain Name
yes
・E-mail Account
yes
・Password
yes
・POP3 Port Number
yes
・APOP Authentication
5sec. - 99 hrs 59min. 59sec, 0 (Stop)
・Auto Rx Interval
SMTP Rx Setting
50 characters
・Rx Domain Name
0-65535
・Rx Port Number
・E-mail Address/Domain Name/IP Address to 50 characters x 5
allow Rx
1-37
E-mail Settings (only Admin.)
Item
Attachment File Format
Coding Method of TIFF-FX (Profile-F)
Insert Body Text in Tx
・YES/NO
・Language
・Sender's Information
# of Body Text Template
Items for Body Text Template
・Template Name
・Subject
・Body Text
Show recipients on Tx e-mail
Specifications / Comments
TIFF-FX(Profile-S) (default)
TIFF-FX(Profile-F)
PDF
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
yes
English
Attached/Not attached
10
yes, 40 characters
yes, 80 characters
yes, 1024 characters
yes (show all recipients)
no (show no recipients)
Insert Signature
no
・YES/NO
no
・Signature Setting (text area)
Request for Reception Confirmation
yes
・DSN Request
yes
・MDN Request
yes
・DSN+MDN Request
yes
・Do not request
no
・MDN Waiting Period
Reply to MDN
yes
・YES/NO
・Yes only when you are designated as "TO" no
recipient
・E-mail Address/Domain Name to allow reply 50 characters x 5
MDN
Handle of undecipherable E-mail reception
no
・Print Error Report
yes (default)
・Send Error Report
yes
・Return Original Mail
yes
・Forward to other E-mail Address
1 destination, 50 characters
Forwarding E-mail Address
Handle of Rx E-mail with Forwarding Request
yes
・Deny Request
yes
・Accept Request
E-mail Address/Domain Name to allow for- 50 characters x 5
warding
yes
・Return Forwarding Result
1-38
Archive Settings (only Admin.)
Item
Auto Archiving ON/OFF
Documents for Archiving
・Memory Tx Fax
・PC-Fax Tx
・Tx I-Fax
・Memory Rx Fax
・Rx I-Fax
・Fax Forward Tx
・Scanner Tx Fax
・Manual Tx Fax
・F-code Secure Box Rx Fax
・F-code Bulletin Box Rx Fax
・Polling Rx Fax
・F-code Polling Rx Fax
・Polling Tx Fax
・F-code Polling Tx Fax
・Scanned Document
・Print Document
・Copy Document
・Report Tx
・Canceled Jobs
Non-available functions when the Archive setting is
ON
Archiving Destinations
・E-mail Address
・Fax Number
・Folder
・FTP Address
・User
File Format of archived document
Index file of archived documents
・Data Type
・Communication Executed Time
・File Name
・File Path
・# of pages
・Sender
・Destination
・Communication Result
Archiving setting by user
Specifications / Comments
yes (Control panel/Browser)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
Scanner Tx, Manual Tx, F-Code Secure Tx
F-Code Bulletin Board Tx
yes (Tx I-Fax cannot be archived to I-Fax)
yes
yes
no
no
PDF / TIFF-S / TIFF (default: TIFF-S)
yes, when the network folder is selected as destination (CSV format, up to 1000 logs in 1 file)
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
1-39
Network Scan Setting (only Admin.)
Item
Batch Scan Setting
・ON (1 stuck -> 1 file)
・OFF(1 page -> 1 file)
・Sheet Mode (1 sheet -> 1 file)
Storage Period of scanned Document
Specifications / Comments
yes (default)
yes
no
yes, 1-99 days/Indefinite (default: Indefinite)
Shortcut Settings
Item
Specifications / Comments
Create Folder Short-cut
yes (max. 300 short-cuts)
T he # of shortcut increase by CF quantity in- no
crease
Setting Items
yes
・Shortcut Name
yes
・Folder Path
yes
・User Name
yes
・Password
yes (default: ON)
・Automatic Network Login
Create FTP URL Short-cut
yes (max. 20 short-cuts)
The # of shortcut increase by CF quantity increase no
Setting Items
yes
・Shortcut Name
yes
・Host Name
yes
・Folder Name
yes
・User Name
yes
・Password
File Name Settings
Item
File Name Setting
・Auto
・Manual
・Select
Category Setting (Scan to OB)
・Manual
・Select
Specifications / Comments
yes, YYYYMMDDHHMMSS
yes, up to 100 characters
yes (# of prefixed name: 10)
yes, up to 20 characters
yes (# of prefixed type: 10)
Personal Outbox Setting (only Admin.)
Item
Specifications / Comments
Tx Document Delete/Leave after Tx completion
yes (default: Delete)
yes,1-99 days/Indefinite (default: 30 days)
・Storage Period of Tx Document
(when "leave" is selected)
CoverPage
yes
・ON/OFF Setting
yes
・Template Select
80 characters
・Default Subject
1024 characters
・Default Message
Check Message Print ON/OFF when PC-Fax Tx no (check message is printed out)
Error
1-40
Temporary Stored Document (only User)
Item
Operation for Temporary Stored Document
・Reference
・Delete
Received Fax Forward Setting (only Admin.)
Item
Storage Period of Rx Document
Auto Routing Function
・Routing Method
・Setting Method
・Routing Table Display
・Routing Table Edit
・Routing Table Details
・Name
・Conditions (refer to PC-Fax sheet)
・Destinations (refer to PC-Fax sheet)
・Active/Inactive
・Routing Setting Import/Export
・Routing Table Print
・Share Routing Condition
Forward Setting (only User)
Item
# of settings
Items for Forward Setting
・Fax
・E-mail Address
・User
・Leave on Rx Box
・Forward & Print
・Start Time (Mon/Day, day of week, Time)
・End Time (Mon/Day, day of week, Time)
・Repeat Setting
Initial Settings (only Admin.)
Item
File format of preview document
・TIFF
・PDF
File format of downloaded OB document
・TIFF
・PDF
Delete/Leave documents after download
Storage Period of temporary stored documents
Specifications / Comments
yes (only docs uploaded by himself)
yes (only docs uploaded by himself)
Specifications / Comments
yes, 1-99 days/Indefinite (default: 30 days)
yes
Dedicated Routing Table, 100
Browser
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
Specifications / Comments
1
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Specifications / Comments
yes (default)
yes
yes (default)
yes
yes
yes, 1-30 days/Indefinite (default: 1days)
Public Inbox Setting (only Admin.)
Item
Shared Rx Function ON/OFF
Auto Delete of Shared Rx Documents
Specifications / Comments
yes (default: ON)
yes (default: OFF)
Storage Period of Shared Rx Documents
Admin. Authority request to delete documents
yes, 1-99 days/Indefinite (default: 30 days)
yes (default: ON)
1-41
Bulletin Board Setting (only Admin.)
Item
Bulletin Board Function ON/OFF
Billing Period Initial Setting
Specifications / Comments
no
Bill Indefinitely / Delete after a certain period
Billing Period of Bulletin Board Documents
Admin. Authority request to delete documents
yes, 1-99 days (default: 30 days)
yes (default: ON)
Circulation Setting
Item
Circulation Function ON/OFF
Auto Delete after circulation
no
N/A
Specifications / Comments
Storage Period of documents after circulation
Admin. Authority request to delete documents
N/A
N/A
Request Processing Setting
Item
Request Processing Function ON/OFF
Default period of process
no
N/A
Specifications / Comments
Document auto delete after process completion or N/A
requested period expiration
Storage period of documents after process com- N/A
pletion or requested period expiration
Admin. Authority request to delete documents
N/A
SNMP Agent Setting (only Admin.)
Item
Setting Method
Service Activate ON/OFF
Agent Recognition Setting
・Contact Destination
・Name
・Location
Security Setting
Request All Host
IP Address
Community Name
Request Designated Host
# of Designated Host
IP Address
Community Name
Trap sending destination
# of destination
Notice event
Consumable Order Information
SNMP Agent Initialize
Network Filtering Setting (only Admin.)
Item
Setting Method
MAC Address
・Available # of settings
IP Address
・Available # of settings
・Range specification
Unacceptable Port Number
・Available # of settings
Initialize
Specifications / Comments
Browser
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
3
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
yes
Version 1
Specifications / Comments
Browser
yes, Accept or Refuse
50
yes, Accept or Refuse
50
yes, within the 4th octet
yes
50
yes (Browser/Control Panel)
1-42
Machine Setting (only Admin.)
Item
Setting Method
Setting Items
・Jobs waiting to print
・Copy Settings
・Fax Settings
・Scanner Settings
・Mail Settings
・Management Settings
・F-code Box Settings
・Junk Fax Block Settings
・Soft Key Settings
・User Install
Specifications / Comments
Browser/Control Panel
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Remote Connection Setting (only Admin.)
Item
Setting Method
Setting ON/OFF
Specifications / Comments
Browser (in the upgraded version)
yes (in the upgraded version)
Login Name
Login Password
Initialize
yes (in the upgraded version)
yes (in the upgraded version)
yes (in the upgraded version)
1-43
LDAP Settings
LDAP Basic Specification
Item
LDAP Supported Version Version.2
Version.3
LDAP Operation
Search
Compare
Delete
Add
Modify
Programmable LDAP Server
Item
# of LDAP Server
LDAP Setting Parameters
Name
LDAP Server Name
IP Address
LDAP Port #
Search Base
# of max. results setting
Time Limit
Authentication
anonymous
name
name+password
SASL
Search Method
Specifications / Comments
no
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
Specifications / Comments
5
yes, 23 characters
yes, 99 characters
yes
yes
yes, 99 characters
yes, 001-100 (default 50)
yes, 0000-9999 (default: 0000 = Unlimited)
yes
yes
yes
no
Any, Initial, Final, Equal, Not Use
1-44
LDAP Search Operation
Item
Search Method
Name
Default Name Description1
Default Name Description2
# of characters
E-Mail
Default E-Mail Description1
Default E-Mail Description2
# of characters
Fax #
Default Fax Description1
Default Fax Description2
# of characters
TEL#
Default TEL Description1
Default TEL Description1
# of characters
Organization
Default Organization Description1
Default Organization Description1
# of characters
Search Rule Setting
Search Key Rule Setting
Equal
Initial
Final
Any
Not Equal
Not Any
Exist
Not Use
Operation Interface
MFP Control Panel
Browser via network
LDAP Search Result Operation
Item
Continue to search with referer
# of referers
# of continuous referers
Display detailed information
Use search results as
Fax destination
E-Mail destination
Address Book Registration
Multiple-destination
Specifications / Comments
yes
cn
commonname
49 characters
yes
mail
49 characters
yes
facsimileTelephoneNumber
yes
telephonenumber
49 characters
yes
o
ou
49 characters
yes
Default setting
yes
yes
yes
yes (default)
no
no
no
yes
yes
yes(Multi Clients)
Specifications / Comments
yes
3
10
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
1-45
Supported character codes
Item
US ASCII
UTF-8(Latin1)
Specifications / Comments
yes
yes
Supported directory servers
Item
Active directory on Microsoft Windows 2000 server yes
(ENG)
Active directory on Microsoft Windows 2003 server yes
(ENG)
Novell e-Directory on Windows 2000 server(ENG) no
OpenLDAP on LINUX(ENG)
yes
1-46
Specifications / Comments
Network Authentication
Supported Authentication Servers
Item
Windows NT 4.0 Server SP4 later
Windows 2000 Server (Active Directory)
yes
yes
Windows Server 2003 (Active Directory)
yes
Supported Protocol for Authentication
Item
Windows NT 4.0 Server
Windows 2000 Server/Windows Server 2003
Specifications / Comments
SMB(NTLM version2)
Kerberos v5
Kerberos Basic Functions
Item
Encription Type
Renewal of Tickets
RC4 HMAC
no
Cache of Tickets
Clock Synchronization Method
no
SNTP version1
Specifications / Comments
Specifications / Comments
LDAP Basic Functions
Item
Search Start Point
Specifications / Comments
GSSAPI(only Network Authentication)
|(UserPrincipalName=<user>@<domain>)(sAMAc
countName=<user>)
<user> : user name
<domain> : domain name
display
Name
cn
mail
telephoneNumber
department
The domain at each level is specified by "dc=".
Search Method of Authentication Server
Item
Windows NT 4.0 Server
Windows 2000 Server/Windows Server 2003
Specifications / Comments
WINS or Broadcast
DNS
Authentication of Domain with Mutual Trust
Item
Windows NT 4.0 Server
Windows 2000 Server/Windows Server 2003
yes
yes
SASL Support
Search Filter
Search Attributes
Specifications / Comments
Mail Address Relation
Item
Acquisition of User Mail Address
Windows NT 4.0 Server
Windows 2000 Server/Windows Server 2003
Use of Mail Address of Equipment
From Format
Specifications / Comments
no
yes
When the user mail address was not able to be acquired.
displays Name<mail> or cn<mail>
1-47
Logout Display
Item
Specifications / Comments
Reset Key Pressing
Display of User Name
yes
N/A
Display of User Mail Address
Number of Displays of Mail Addresses
N/A
N/A
Network Authentication Settings
Item
Read/Write Protect
Default Authentication Server
Automatic Logout Function Support
Range of Automatic Logout Time
Default Automatic Logout Time
Authentication Setting of Each Function
Default of Copy Authentication
Default of Fax Authentication
Default of Scan Authentication
yes
None
yes
1 -10 (min)
3 (min)
yes
no
yes
yes
Number of characters that can be input
Item
User Name
Password
Domain Name
Windows NT Server
Active Directory
50
32
15 or 64
15
64
Authentication Situation
Item
MFP Control Panel
Browser via network
PC-Print
PC-FAX
TWAIN
Specifications / Comments
Specifications / Comments
Specifications / Comments
yes
no
no
no
no
Others
Item
Single Sign-on with OB login
Specifications / Comments
yes, when the User ID and Password are the same
1-48
2 Machine Composition
2.1 Document Scanning Sequence
2.1.1 ADF Detection
When a document is placed into the document feeder, Document Sensor 1 (DS1) is activated and you
will hear the short beep.
The document will be transferred when the start key is pressed.
Document separation is the process that allows a multi-page document to go through the scanner
one page at a time. The top document is separated from the remaining documents by friction of the
separator roller.
Following the document separation, the feed roller causes the document to advance. As it advances,
the leading edge of the document activates the Document Sensor 2 (DS2) sensor. Once DS2 is
activated, the feed roller continues to rotate until the document reaches the scan position. The
machine uses the distance from DS2 to the scan position and the diameter of the feed roller to
determine the number of rotations necessary to feed the document to the scan position.
When the document reaches the scan position, the light from the scanner lamp strikes the face of the
document and is reflected into the lens through mirrors A, B, and C. In case the light intensity along
the length of the scanner lamp is not uniform, shading compensation is provided to ensure even
illumination.
As the reflected image passes through the lens, it is focused onto the charged coupled device (CCD).
The CCD then converts the dark and light areas of the image into electrical impulses, or image data.
When DS2 detects the trailing edge of the document, the image signal output is turned off. The
scanner continues to remain active for a few more seconds in case there is another document to
follow.
The scanned document is discharged through the document exit by the exit roller.
MFX-2050 / MFX-1450
Pickup roller
Separator roller
DS1 (Feeler)
Separator pad
Exit roller
Feed roller
DS2 (Feeler)
Press roller
Mirror B
CCD
Mirror C
Home sensor
Lens
Mirror A
Mirror A
Scanner unit
F-565 / F-525
Separator roller
Pickup roller
DS1 (Feeler)
Separator pad
Exit roller
Feed roller
DS2 (Feeler)
Press roller
Mirror B
CCD
Lens
Mirror C
Home sensor
Mirror A
Scanner unit
2-1
Mirror A
Original Detection
The sizes of the documents are detected by the following two sensors;
Detection
Document presence
Action
Detects whether there is a document on
Sensor
DS1
Leading and trailing edge
detection
the tray or not
Detects the leading and trailing edge of
the feeding document
DS2
2-2
2.1.2 FBS section (MFX-2050 / MFX-1450 only)
Light reflected from the original passes through three mirrors and a lens to form a reduced image on the CCD
Sensor as the Scanner Motor moves the Scanner. The CCD sensor converts the light pattern (image data) into
an electrical image signal.
The electrical image signal is then output to the Main Board.
CCD
Scanner unit
Home sensor
Exposure Section: Construction and Function
2
1
1
3
1 Reflector Tape
The Reflector Tape reflects the light from the Exposure Lamp and supplements its illumination.
2 Exposure Lamp
A Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp (CCFL) is used to illuminate the original.
3 Mirror
Directs the reflected light from the original to the lens.
2-3
Scanner frame Moving Mechanism
• During a scan, the scanner frame projects an even amount of light from the Exposure Lamp onto the entire
surface of the original. The light is reflected from the original to the Mirror through the lens to the CCD.
• The scanner frame is driven by the FBS Motor and Scanner Drive belts.
• Scanner speed is determined by the set zoom ratio in reference to the full size mode.
• The scanner frame is at home position where ADF scanning begins. The home sensor watches this position.
FBS Motor
Lamp
Home sensor
CCD PCB
Lens
2-4
Scanner frame
2.2 Recording Section
Recording Paper Feed Path
A sheet of the recording paper is separated from the remaining paper by the friction of the pickup
roller.
The paper is moved along the paper guide until it reaches the register roller. It then fed by the rotation
of the register roller.
If there is a duplex printing unit, the machine can print both sides of the paper (duplex printing).
When the first side of the paper is printed, it is transferred to the exit. However after a few steps after
the PDS and DPS sensor detected the trailing edge, the exit roller rolls in reverse and the paper is
transferred to the image processing area by the duplex rollers.
It reaches to the image transfer area turned inside out, and the duplex side of the paper is printed.
2-5
2.3 Image Processing
Incoming data is received from the telephone line by the NCU and sent to the main control PCB. The
modem, located on the main control PCB, demodulates the data.
The data is then sent to the printer for image processing.
The image processing is roughly divide into the following steps:
1. Drum Charging
2. Drum Exposure
3. Development
4. Image transfer
5. Fusing
6. Erasing
7. Cleaning
Drum charging
Fusing
Cleaning
Exposure
Drum
Eraser Lamp
Image transfer
Development
2.3.1 Drum Charge
• The Drum is charged with corona discharge before LED exposure. A charge wire and a charge grid
are used for the charging method.
• The corona discharge generates little ozone in the printer. It also keeps the wire from becoming dirty.
Because the discharge, the Drum can be charged evenly.
2.3.2 Drum Exposure
The light makes an invisible static image from the LED print head.
The LED print head, located inside the printer cover, closes down over the drum and projects light
onto the drum surface. When the document is to be printed, individual elements in the LED print head
turn on and expose the drum wherever a dark area should appear in the document.
2-6
2.3.3 Development
Toner is applied to the invisible static image on the Drum and a toner image is created on the surface.
Toner agitator
Drum
Developing roller
Toner supply roller
1
2
3
4
Part Name
Toner Agitator
Toner supply Roller
Developing Roller
Drum
Function
Agitates toner.
Transports the toner to the developing roller.
Carries the toner to the Drum surface for development.
Exposed by LED light to create an invisible image and
rotates to carry the developed image to the paper surface.
2.3.4 Image Transfer
Image transfer is the process of transferring the toner image created on the Drum in the developing
process to paper. In the Roller Image Transfer, there is little generation of ozone due to corona
discharge. Also, there is no blur of toner because the paper is always pressed by the Drum and the
Image Transfer Roller.
Image transfer roller
PC Drum
Hight voltage unit - output
2-7
2.3.5 Erasing
An LED lamp exposes the Drum surface. When it is exposed the drum charge erases. This helps the
drum to be recharged evenly at the next step of charging.
Drum
LED Lamp
2.3.6 Cleaning
The residual toner or paper dust must be removed from the drum. Paper dust is removed from the
drum surface by a rubber roller. And then by a metallic roller, and finally scraped off.
The residual toner is removed by the developing roller and toner supply roller, and is recycled.
Cleaning
Drum
Development
2-8
2.3.7 Fusing
An Overview
The toner image transferred on to the paper is securely fixed.
A heat roller system is used as the fusing system. The toner image is fused by Heater Roller heated
by the Heater Lamp, and securely fixed by the pressure between the Heater roller and Press rollers.
A Thermistor detects and controls the Heater Roller temperature.
The Thermostat functions when the Heater Lamp is not turned OFF even if the Thermistor detects a
high temperature malfunction.
Press roller
Exit roller
Paper separate blade
Thermistor
Press roller
Heater lamp
Heater roller
2-9
Fusing Temperature Control Circuit
The Thermistor detects the surface temperature of the Heater Roller and inputs that analog voltage
into the Main Control PCB. Corresponding to this data, the Heater Lamp ON/OFF signal is output to
the Heater ON/OFF switch of the power supply unit, causing the Heater Lamp to turn ON or OFF to
control the fusing temperature.
When the Heater Lamp is not turned OFF even if the Thermistor detects a high temperature
malfunction, the thermostat shuts down the power to the heater lamp. When the thermostat is
malfunction, the thermal cut-off shuts down the power to the heater lamp.
AC Inlet
L
N
Main switch
Power supply unit
Heater
on/off
switch
Main Control PCB
Fusing temperature
control circuit
Fusing unit
Thermistor
Heater Lamp
Thermostat
Thermal cut-off
Fusing temperature
1) Warming Up
After the initialization of the printer, warming up of the printer starts and the
Heater Lamp turns ON until the temperature of the Heater Roller reaches approx. 180 °C or 200 °C according to the machine type.
2) Printing
When the printer obtains the printing command from its controller, the Heater
Roller is maintained at 180 °C or 195 °C according to the machine type.
After printing, the printer turns to standby mode. The fuser kept at low temperature.
3) Standby mode
The Heater Roller maintained at approx. 110 °C or 130 °C according to the
machine type.
4) Energy save mode In this mode, saving the power.
2-10
MFX-2050 / F-565
Temperature
( F)
( C)
401
205
392
200
195
393
248
Post card printing only
OHP
130
Warming
up
Standby
mode
Printing
Standby mode
Energy save mode
Time
Power ON
MFX-1450 / F-525
Temperature
( F)
( C)
392
200
356
180
160
320
230
Post card printing only
OHP
110
Warming
up
Standby
mode
Printing
Standby mode
Power ON
2-11
Energy save mode
Time
2.4 Interconnect Block Diagram
See the attached files.
2-12
2.5 Main Control PCB
The main control PCB controls the operations of all machine functions.
Jumper JP1 on the main control PCB is used for battery back up of the SRAM. All user programmed
data and internal memory switch settings are held in SRAM. Removing JP1 will initialize the SRAM.
If the power is turned off, the battery will provide up to five years of back up when fully charged.
Note: JP1 should remain in the “ON” position at all times.
Memory (FLASH MEMORY, SRAM, SDRAM)
FLASH MEMORY --- The FLASH MEMORY contains all program instructions for unit operation.
SRAM ---The SRAM, which is backed-up by a lithium battery is used to store user programmed
information.
SDRAM ---The SDRAM is used for buffer, which is backed-up by a battery is used to store memorized documents.
Note: Turning parameters for Color(R,G,B) and Gray mode are stored in the EEPROM(IC42). When
the PCB MAIN is replaced, the EEPROM on malfunction PCB should be replaced to the new
PCB.
KEY
PANAEL PCB B
NCU PCB
DISPLAY
PANEL
CPU
TONE RXA
TXA
PANAEL PCB A
+24V,+12V,AREF
MONITOR
CONTROL
MODEM
CCFL
INVERTER
+24V
SDRAM
CPU
FLASH
MEMORY
IMAGE
PROCESS
CCD
CCD PCB
USB
MFP
ENGINE
Lithium
SRAM
MOTOR
CONTROL
FBS
MOTOR
SDRAM
ADF
MOTOR
PRINTER
CONTROL
Ni-MH
+24V,
+5V,+3.3V
+24V,
POWER SUPPLY
UNIT
SDRAM
Extention Memory
AC
MAIN CONTROL PCB
CENECTOR-B PCB
PRINTER
UNIT
H.V.POWER
SUPPLY UNIT
Main control PCB block diagram
2-13
2.6 Network Control Unit (NCU) PCB
The NCU PCB provides the connection to the telephone line. It consists of the interface circuit, ring
signal detector and telephone control circuit.
NCU PCB block diagram for USA
NCU PCB block diagram for GBR
Major components of the NCU
DP relay
Connects the telephone line to the fax.
S relay
Used to connect the telephone line at seizure state.
OH & Tone detector
Detects the On-hook condition of the second telephone unit.
H relay
Disconnects the Tel1 and Tel2 line from PSTN.
24V generator
Supplies 24 volts to the relays for OH detection of optional handset or external telephone line.
Ring signal detector
A photo coupler that detects an incoming ring.
2-14
2.7 Power Supply Unit (PSU)
The power supply unit receives the input line voltage and currents it to output voltages of +3.3DVC,
+5 VDC and +24 VDC.
The heater circuit controls output voltage to the fuser heater according to instructions received from
the heater control circuit.
If an over-current is sensed in the secondary circuit, power is interrupted.
The power supply unit has two output connectors.
The following table shows the connector outputs:
CN101 -- to the Fuser Heater
Pin No.
Output
1
L
2
N
CN2 -- to the Main Control PCB.
Pin No.
Output
voltage
1
PC
2
3
HC2 HC1
4
5
+5V
6
7
SG
2-15
8
9
+3.3V
10
11
SG
12
13
+24V
14
15
PG
2.8 Sensors
2.8.1 Sensor Locations
The following illustration shows the relative positions of the machine’s sensors.
HS
PES1
TS2
TS1
JAMC2
OPEN2
PES2
APS
DS1
DS2
TXIL
COVER-SW
PDS
DPS
JAMC1
PSS
Thermistor
OPEN1
TRAYS
2-16
2.8.2 Sensor Descriptions
The following table gives a brief description of each sensor and its function.
Code
Name
Detects
Sensor Type
DS1
Document sensor 1
Presence of document in
Photo
feeder
interrupter
DS2
Document sensor 2
Leading and trailing edge of
Photo
document
interrupter
APS
ADF permit sensor
Platen cover quite close or
Photo
not
interrupter
HS
Mirror carriage home Mirror carriage position
Photo
position sensor
interrupter
TXIL(ADF) Interlock switch
Scanner cover open or close
Mechanical
(ADF)
Switch
Cover-SW --Detects front cover and the
Mechanical
1st cassette jam access cover Switch
are open or close
PDS
Paper discharge sen- Detects paper pass at paper
Photo
sor
exit.
interrupter
DPS
Duplex paper sensor Detects paper pass of the
Photo
duplex printing paper
interrupter
Thermistor ---Detects and controls the
Thermistor
Heater Roller temperature
OPEN1
Paper cassette open Detects the 1st paper
Photo
sensor
cassette open or close
interrupter
PES
Paper empty sensor Detects presence of recording Photo
paper in the 1st paper
interrupter
cassette
TS1
Toner sensor 1
Detects the toner empty for
Photo
small capacity toner cartridge interrupter
TS2
Toner sensor
Detects the toner empty for
Photo
large capacity toner cartridge interrupter
PSS
Paper supply sensor Detects paper feeding out of
Photo
cassette/tray
interrupter
TRAYS
Tray sensor
Detects presence of recording Photo
paper in the bypass tray
interrupter
JAMC1
Jam access cover
Detects the side cover open
Photo
sensor
or close
interrupter
PES2
Paper empty sensor
OPEN2
Paper cassette open
sensor
Jam access cover
sensor
JAMC2
Detects presence of recording
paper in the 2nd paper cassette
Detects the 2nd paper cassette
open or close
Detects the 2nd paper cassette
side cover open or close
2-17
Remarks
MFX-2050 /
1450 only
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
Photo interrupter
2.9 Function detail and additional information
2.9.1 Port setting list
Application
Functions
Port
Default
number
Muratec OB InfoMonitor
Acquiring new arrived data
HTTP Port
80
Acquiring the user list
HTTP Port
80
Searching for Server
Search Port
61000
Popping up messages for
new arrived documents
Client Port
60000
Acquiring CoverPage’s list
HTTP Port
80
Uploading CoverPage
HTTP Port
80
Searching for server
Search Port
61000
Acquiring new arrived data
HTTP Port
80
Downloading image
HTTP Port
80
Acquiring the user list
HTTP Port
80
Searching for server
Searching Port
61000
Installer
Searching for server
Searching Port
61000
TWAIN
Acquiring new arrived data
HTTP Port
80
Downloading image
HTTP Port
80
Acquiring the user list
HTTP Port
80
Searching for server
Search Port
61000
Sending print data
HTTP Port
80
Muratec OB
CoverPageEditor
Muratec OB Document
Download Manager
Printer
2.9.2 Address Book Import / Export
CSV files and vCard files are able to import to or export from the Address book using the browser.
The following items will be covered in this section:
Import details
Import results and error details
Export details
Import details
The following file types are available to import to the address book.
• vCard files
• CSV files exported from Muratec products, Outlook Express or Outlook, or other CSV files
2-18
The machine import the vCard file as the following rule:
vCard
vCard item
BEGIN:VCARD
VERSION:2.1
N:SamKawasaki;
FN:SamKawasaki
ORG:;
TEL;WORK;VOICE:
TEL;WORK;FAX:672-8284
ADR;WORK:;;;;;612-8686
EMAIL:Sam.Kawasaki@muratec.com
END:VCARD
Imported item
Name
Fax Number
E-mail address
CSV file exported from Muratec products
CSV items
Address book items
No.
Address book number
Location
Name
DialNumber
Fax Number
Mail Address
Mail Address
CSV file exported from Outlook Express
CSV items
Address book items
Name
Name
Business Fax
Fax Number
E-mail Address
Mail Address
CSV file exported from Outlook
CSV items
Address book items
First Name, Middle Name and last Name
Name
Business Fax
Fax Number
E-mail Address
Mail Address
Other CSV files
CSV items
Address book items
No.
Address book number
Location
Name
Dial number
Fax Number
Mail address
Mail Address
2-19
Import results and errors
The following is the display when the import succeeded:
The imported record number will be displayed.
The following is the display when the import failed through importation:
The imported record number, the number where the error occurred and the error detail will be
displayed.
2-20
Errors may occur in the following reasons:
Error message
The " " " mark were not entered correctly prior to
the conversion.
The fax number contains a syntax error.
The fax number exceeds 40 digits.
The e-mail address exceeds 50 characters.
The address book cannot store this many numbers.
The fax number and e-mail address were not entered.
The address book number contains a syntax error.
The specified address book number exceeds the
limit.
The specified address book number has already
been registered.
The information on an imported vCard(s) exceeds
512 characters.
The CSV/vCard file selected either cannot be
recognized or is empty.
Detail
The numbers of the double quotation marks were
odd-number. The marks should be even-numbered in CSV files.
Only the numeric characters and dialing characters can be registered in the fax number field.
Available characters: 1 to 9, *, #, -, /, D, F, N, P, S,
T, X
----The NGP cannot store more than 300 contacts. If
the OfficeBridge option is installed, the numbers
may differ according to the CF capacity. (1000,
1500 or 2000)
The fax number or the e-mail address is a mandatory field the address book’s data.
The address book numbers should be specified
between 1 and 300.
It is not possible to register in the same address
book number.
In vCard file, one record should be within 512
characters.
---
Export details
The following two file types are available as exported address book:
•vCard
• CSV
2-21
2.9.3 LDAP
The following topics will be covered in this section:
Setting the Search Base
Setting the Search Attributes
Search Method
The LDIFDE Command
Packet Capturing
Setting the Search Base
The Search Base is used to determine the starting point within the Active Directory or other type of
database for the LDAP search. Enter the Distinguished Name (DN) of the entry where you wish to
begin the search. For example, search base: ou=address book, dc=muratec, dc=local would search
all of the entries at or below the address book in the muratec.local directory. The following is a list of
common attributes used to enter a search base:
o = Organization Name
ou = Organization Name Unit
dc = domain component
c = country
Please contact the system administrator for the DN to configure the LDAP search base.
The search base can be configured via the web interface or from the control panel of the unit.
Control Panel Access: Settings>Management>Network Settings>LDAP Settings>LDAP Server
Settings> Search Base
Setting the Search Attributes
The search attributes determine the information that is to be retrieved during an LDAP search. The
attributes can be through the web interface or via the control panel at the following location:
Settings>Management>Network Settings>LDAP Settings>LDAP Parameter Settings
The default settings for the search attributes are as follows:
Name1 cn
Name2 commonname
Mail1 mail
Mail2 <Blank>
Fax1 facsimiletelephonenumber
Fax2 <Blank>
Tel1 telephonenumber
Tel2 <Blank>
Department1 o
Department2 ou
cn = common name
Mail = Email address
o = Organizational Unit
ou = Organizational Unit Name
In each category, the first parameter will be searched first. If an attribute is found in the directory that
is being searched that matches the parameter, the associated data is shown in the search results. If a
2-22
match is not found, the second parameter is searched if one is programmed. If a match is found, the
associated data is shown in the search results. Please contact the system administrator to confirm
the attributes that are used in the LDAP directory search base.
Additional search attributes can also be configured via the control panel or the web interface. The
attributes programmed in this location are added to the simple search string. To access via the
control panel, go to the following location:
Settings>Management>Network Settings>LDAP Settings>LDAP Server Settings>Optional Setting
Once the optional setting screen has been accessed, the following items can be configured:
Attribute
Choose a DN attribute
Value
Item to be searched under the previous attribute
Search Method Determines the search method that will be used for the previous attribute and attribute
value.
Search Method
The NGP searches using a simple search method
Example:
The user executes a search for “Sam”.
The search string is as follows:
[ l (cn=*sam*)(mail=*sam*)]
Any entry in the search base with “Sam” as part of the common name or email address will be
displayed in the Search Results.
Example 2:
The Optional Search attribute is set as follows:
Attribute=ou, Value=muratec, Search Method=Any
The user performs a search for Sam.
The search string is as follows:
[&(ou=*muratec*)l(cn=*sam*)(mail=*mail*)]
& = and
l = or
A search is performed for entries in the organizational unit Muratec with either a common name or
email address containing Sam.
Restriction for special characters:
Special characters such as alphabet with “umlaut” are 2-byte code characters while usual alphabet
takes only one byte. Therefore in simple search method, word that exceeds 99 characters (bytes) will
not be the target to be searched.
The search strings for advanced search methods cannot exceed 300 bytes. So if too many special
characters are entered in the search filed, the search will not be executed and the error “LDAP
reference execution error” will be displayed.
2-23
LDIFDE Command
The LDIFDE command can be used to download the active directory contents to a text file using a
command line prompt;
Ex.
C:\ldifde –f filename.txt –s servername
Note:The –s switch is not needed if you are currently logged on to the server with the active directory
you wish to download.
Note:Use the –h switch to access the help menu.
The following is a sample from an active directory that was exported using the LDIFDE command:
dn: CN=John Doe,CN=Users,DC=Muratec,DC=local
changetype: add
objectClass: top
objectClass: person
objectClass: organizationalPerson
objectClass: user
cn: John Doe
sn: Doe
givenName: John
distinguishedName: CN=John Doe,CN=Users,DC=Muratec,DC=local
instanceType: 4
whenCreated: 20050130195401.0Z
whenChanged: 20050130195601.0Z
displayName: John Doe
The LDIFDE command can be very useful in determining the attributes to use when configuring the
LDAP server ( See “3.4.2 Setting the Search Attributes” on page 2-22).
If a search is performed and no results are returned for certain parameters, it could be that the
attribute being used for the search by the NGP does not match the attributes in the Directory. To
confirm, perform the LDIFDE function. Compare the attributes used in the Directory to the ones
configured on the NGP. The attributes in the NGP have to match those shown in the LDIFDE file.
2-24
Packet Analyzer
There are several TCP/IP packet analyzers that can be used to analyze the communication between
the NGP and the Active Directory. This information can be used to determine if actual contact is being
made between the NGP and the LDAP server. Below is a sample capture of a LDAP communication
from a packet analyzer program.
We recommend you the two software as below:
1.Ethereal
http://www.ethereal.com/
2.Packetyzer
http://www.networkchemistry.com/products/packetyzer/
2-25
2.9.4 SNMP Setting
MIB (Management Information base)
MIBs are regulated on RFC 2578.
There are MIBs that are provided by the manufacturers and standard MIBs that do not depend on
them.
On MIB, each network equipments has the information that is called OID (Object ID). MIB is managed
in a tree structure. For example, the OID for a vendor identifier may be indicated like “1.3.6.1.2.1.2”.
The information may be a letter string or binary information.
root
iso(1)
org(3)
dod(6)
internet(1)
management(2)
directory(1)
private(4)
expermental(3)
enterprises(1)
mib-2(1)
cisco
system(1)
interface(2)
at(3)
ip(4)
transmission(10)
ppp(23)
pr(32)
snmp(1)
icmp(5)
ospf(14)
rs232(33)
2-26
tcp(6)
hp
udp(7)
bgp(15)
rmon(16)
hitachi
SNMP(Simple Network Management Protocol)
SNMP is a protocol regulated by RFC 1157. It manages the network system activity on TCP/IP.
NGP corresponds to version 1. The latest version is version 3(defined by RFC3411)
SNMP is UDP (User Datagram Protocol).
A SNMP manager software such as WebJetAdmin (HP) can retrieve or rewrite information of a SNMP agent
installed network equipment such as NGP by indicating one or more OID.
The SNMP protocol
The SNMP protocol operates at the application layer (layer 7) of the OSI model. It specified (in version 1) five
core protocol data units (PDUs):
GET REQUEST, is used to request the values of one or more MIB variables.
GETNEXT REQUEST, is used to read the values of variables in the MIB but sequentially. It is often used
to read though a table of values. After a first read with the get-request, get-next-request are used to read
through the remaining rows.
SET REQUEST, is used to update one of the MIB values.
GET RESPONSE, is returned as an answer to a get-request, a get-next-request or set-request message.
TRAP, is used to support significant events (e.g. a cold or a warm restart or a link that has gone down).
Pattern 1
GetRequest
Get information of
this object
Manager
Agent
GetReque
st
GetResponse
se
Send response
GetRespon
GetNextRequest
Get information of
the next object
GetNextReq
uest
se
GetRespon
Pattern 2
Manager
Agent
SetRequest
Set information of
this object
Pattern 3
SetReque
st
se
GetRespon
Manager
Agent
TRAP
2-27
An event occured
2.9.5 e-mail gateway
Initiation of the RightFax Off Ramping Function
There are 3 methods to initiate the fax forwarding (off ramping) to the RightFax Server. The adequate
option is depending on the gateway setting at the RightFax server side.
1.Transmit E-mail to the dedicated domain (host.company.com) for initiating the fax forwarding (off
ramping).
Example:
/fax=0000/name=test@host.company.com
In this method, the dedicated domain for receiving the e-mail with fax forwarding initiation is created
on the SMTP/POP3 server. The e-mail is sent to the designated e-mail box then is forwarded to the
designated fax number initiated in the e-mail address field.
2.Transmit E-mail to the e-mail server that initiates the fax forwarding (off ramping).
Example:
/fax=0000/name=test@company.com
fax=0000@company.com
This method makes use of the e-mail server’s functionality that forwards the e-mail with some certain
character string in the address field to the e-mail box designated in advance.
The RightFax server receives the e-mail in the designated e-mail box mentioned above, and then
forwards it to the fax number which is initiated in the e-mail address field.
3.Transmit E-mail to the e-mail address that initiates the fax forwarding (off ramping).
Example:
“/name=tester/fax=0000/”test@company.com
This method is used when the Server side setting means is limited.
The server only creates the e-mail box for the fax forwarding initiation, and the sender inserts the
forwarding initiation character string in the “Nickname” field. It makes use of the e-mail functionality
that the “Nickname” area does not affect the e-mail transmission itself and the location is described in
the <e-mail address> field. The only thing the RightFax Server has to do is to set the POP reception
to the created e-mail box.
2-28
Available Methods in NGP
In the latest version firmware (main unit: C2A0A0, NGP board: C3A0A0) onward, you will find the
[e-mail gateway] function in the [Setting]-[Fax Setting]-[Others] screen and in this setting you can
set the Prefix and Suffix information. Using this function, NGP can automatically add the Prefix and
Suffix information to the entered Fax number and create an e-mail address to transmit to the RightFax
server.
The following 2 methods are available in the NGP to work with the RightFax server.
<Method A>
It is working on the method 2 of the RightFax’s Off Ramping function. (see 3.6.1 Initiation of the
RightFax Off Ramping Function). In this case, you need to set the Prefix and Suffix information as
follows.
Prefix : fax=
Suffix : @company.com
When you enter the fax number 555-1212 on the NGP and start the transmission, the e-mail is
created with the address fax=555-1212@company.com and sent to the RightFax server, then the Off
Ramp function will operate.
<Method B>
It is working on the method 3 of the RightFax’s Off Ramping function (see 3.6.1 Initiation of the
RightFax Off Ramping Function).
In this case, when you want to create the e-mail address “fax=555-1212”<test04@company.com>,
you need to set the Prefix and Suffix information as follows.
Prefix : “fax=
Suffix : ”<test04@company.com>
When you enter the fax number 555-1212 and start transmission, the address “fax=555-1212”
<test04@company.com> is created and the RightFax Server initiate the fax forwarding correctly.
Note :It seems that the RightFax server only forwards the first part of the e-mail initiated to forward,
and the second part onward is ignored (there is no such description in the RightFax specification
documents but actually it does not work).
Therefore, when sending the e-mail from NGP, note not to attach the e-mail body text, or only
the body part is forwarded but the scanned documents are not forwarded.
2-29
2.9.6 Network server authentication
Network environment and protocol
• The network authentication is a domain authentication Windows NT 4.0 Server, Windows 2000 and
2003 Server (Active Directory).
• The authentication protocol for Windows 2000 and 2003 server is Kerberos (encryption algorithm:
RSA RC4) and SMB (NTLM version 2). Windows NT 4.0 Server should be SP4 or later.
• The network server is specified by the domain name.
Windows NT uses WINS and Broadcast to detect the server (domain controller).
Active Directory uses SRV record (_ldap._tcp.<domain name>) of DNS to detect the server
(domain controller). A DNS that contains domain controller information and is compatible with
SRV record should be registered to the NGP.
• Active Directory uses LDAP to acquire user information such as e-mail address of the user from the
directory.
DNS
1 Search for Data Center
2 Search result
NGP
4 Authentication result
6 LDAP result
3 Kerberos authentication
5 User information acquisition (LDAP)
DC
Figure 1 : Basic Authentication flow for Active Directory
WINS
1 Search for Data
Center(DC)
NGP
2 Search result
3 DC search on NBT Broadcast (When WINS failed)
4 Search result (When WINS failed)
6 Authentication result
5. Kerberos authentication
DC
Figure 2㧦Basic authentication flow for Windows NT
2-30
LDAP
In Active Directory, after Kerberos authentication, LDAPv3 is used to acquire the user information.
RC4 is used to encrypt the password.
The search is executed with following parameter:
Search Filter:
UserPrincipalName = <user>@<domain> OR
SAMAccountName = <user>
<user> : user name
<domain> : domain name
Search Attribute:
displayName
cn
mail
telephoneNumber
facsimileTelephoneNumber
department
Bace DN : domain name
• The user’s e-mail address acquired by LDAP is adopted to the “From” field of IFAX and e-mail that
the logging-on-user requires. The format of “From” field shall be ”displayName<mail>” or ”cn<mail>”.
If the displayName is not acquired, cn shall be used instead.
• If the e-mail address is not acquired, the e-mail address that registered on the NGP shall be used.
• The e-mail address required by the user shall also take effect after the user has logged out.
• The LDAP server setting differs from which it is registered for LDAP search. The LDAP server shall
be acquired through DNS domain controller search.
• Kerberos system shall be used only in LDAP search for authentication.
2-31
3 Adjustment Procedures
3.1 Field Service Program Modes
The fax machine feature maintenance modes for machine adjustment. Each mode is listed below
along with the command used to activate the mode and a brief functional description.
Note: When you press <*>, you will hear short beeps. However continue the operation, as there is no
problem.
Set or Clear Machine Parameters.................................................................. <Setting>, <*>,< 0>, <0>
Used to set or clear machine parameters.
Set or Clear Memory Switches....................................................................... <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <1>
Used to set or clear memory switches.
Clear Programmed Data / User Settings....................................................... <Setting>, <*>, <0>,< 2>
Erases user-programmed information (date, time, TTI, address book, etc.) and any documents stored in memory.
All RAM Clear................................................................................................... <Setting>, <*>,< 0>, <3>
Erases same information as “Clear Programmed Data / User Settings” function along with
resetting all of the machine parameters, memory switches and unique switches to factory
defaults.
Set or Clear Unique Switches......................................................................... <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <4>
Used to set or clear Unique switches.
T.30 Monitor Print............................................................................................ <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <5>
Used to print a G3 procedural summary of the fax communication.
Printer maintenance........................................................................................ <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <6>
Access this mode to determine the cause of the “Please Call Service” error message.
Or, when replaced the Fuser unit or Image transfer roller, reset the counter using this mode.
Monitor Speaker.............................................................................................. <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <8>
Use to hear the signal sound with machine’s speaker during fax transaction.
Test Modes....................................................................................................... <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>
Allows the technician to perform a series of diagnostic tests.
Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switches and
Unique Switches List...................................................................................... <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <0>
Prints a list of the machine switch settings showing the default settings and current settings.
Factory Functions .......................................................................................... <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>
Allows the technician to perform a series of diagnostic tests.
Line Tests......................................................................................................... <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <2>
Allows the technician to perform a series of diagnostic tests.
Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode....................................................................... <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <4>
Perform it before installing the fax machine.
Set or clear the consumable order sheet...................................................... <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <5>
Used to set or clear the consumable order sheet.
DRAM Clear...................................................................................................... <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <6>
Used to clear a DRAM.
Clear Life Monitor............................................................................................ <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <7>
Used to clear a Life monitor keeps a count of the pages scanned, etc.
Clear option module’s SRAM.......................................................................... <Setting> <*>, <1>. <8>
Used to clear a SRAM of option module.
Set Service Code............................................................................................. <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <9>
Used to protect to clear a Life monitor.
Life Monitor Maintenance............................................................................... <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <0>
Used to protect to clear a Life monitor.
Sensor Input test ............................................................................................ <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <2>
Sensor diagnostic test.
3-1
Printer diagnostic mode................................................................................. <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <3>
Printer diagnostic test.
Network service mode ................................................................................... <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <4>
Used to display the server sumcheck, export/import the network setting data or to initialize
the network settings.
Set second line ............................................................................................... <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <8>
Used to set memory switches, unique switches, ECM mode, pause length and numbers of
rings for the second telephone line.
Flash ROM Sum check.................................................................................... <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <9>
Used to confirm flash ROM Check Sum after the software is overwritten.
Service Report setting.................................................................................... <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <2>
Used to enter location where to send the service report.
Printer registration adjustment...................................................................... <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <3>
Used to adjust the printer registration.
Update the software via network................................................................... <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <0>
Used to upgrade the software via network.
Update the software........................................................................................ <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <8>
Used to upgrade the software using the USB RomWrite application.
Quick installation mode.................................................................................. <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <9>
You can set the initial setting mode, consumable order sheet setting and service report
setting continuously.
3-2
3.2 Machine Parameter Adjustment
3.2.1 Setting the Machine Parameters
These switches are used to program internal machine parameters. The primary back up battery
maintains these settings if power is lost.
1. From standby, press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <0>.
2. Press [Edit Parameters].
3. Call up the desired switch by pressing[
] or[
], or by pressing the numeric keypad.
4. Select the desired parameter by pressing the box.
5. To navigate through the machine parameter settings:
• The bits are ranged from 7 (left) to 0 (right).
• Press [ ] or[ ] of the cursor key to move the cursor.
• Press [0] or [1] on the numeric keypad, or[
] or[
], to change the bit value.
• Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed parameter and return to the machine parameter edit screen.
• Press [Back] not to save the setting of the displayed parameter.
6. If you want to set other machine parameters, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7.
7. Press <Reset> to return the machine to standby.
Note: You can confirm the initial setting of each Machine parameter by the Machine Parameters List.
The Machine Parameters List will be printed by pressing <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <0>.
3-3
3.2.2 Clearing the Machine Parameters
Resets the machine parameters to factory defaults.
1. From standby, press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <0>.
2. Press [Clear Parameters].
3. Press [Yes]. The machine parameters will reset to factory defaults.
Note: To finish the operation without clearing the parameters, press [No].
4. Press <Reset> to return the machine to standby.
3-4
Machine Parameter 000 ~ 006 — Factory use only
Machine Parameter 007
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
DRAM capacity indication
on the Main PCB
This switch indicates the DRAM capacity.
(This switch is read only, do not set any character)
You can see the memory capacity by how many “1”
is indicated on the LCD. One “1” means 8MB.
For example, if three “1” are indicated,
i.e. “00000111”, the DRAM capacity is
8MB x 3 = 24MB.
DRAM capacity indication
on the Main PCB
Machine Parameter 008 and 009 — Factory use only
Machine Parameter 010
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
ADF scanner registration
adjustment (Horizontal)
Switch
Adjusts the start point to
scan the document.
The plus setting increases
the left margin and the minus
setting decreases it.
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi
(0.0847 mm)
Note: These values
are factory set and should
not be adjusted unless
instructed by a Muratec
technical representative.
3-5
76543210
127 steps01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
10001000
:
10010000
:
10100000
:
-127steps 11111111
Settings
+10.76 mm
+2.71 mm
+1.36 mm
+0.68mm
0 mm  Initial setting
-0.68 mm
-1.36 mm
-2.71 mm
-10.76 mm
Machine Parameter 011
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Adjustment of the scanning
stretching and squeezing for
ADF.
(Horizontal)
Switch 76543210
The plus setting stretches the
image data and the
minus setting squeezes it.
Each setting changes by
0.1%
Note: These values are
factory set and should not be
adjusted unless instructed by
a Muratec technical
representative.
00001111
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000010
00000001
00000000
10000001
10000010
:
10000100
:
10001000
:
10001111
Settings
+1.5 %
+0.8 %
+0.4 %
+0.2 %
+0.1 %
0 %  Initial setting
-0.1 %
-0.2 %
-0.4 %
-0.8 %
-1.5 %
Machine Parameter 012
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Adjustment of the scanning
stretching and squeezing for
ADF.
(Vertical)
Switch 76543210
The plus setting squeezes
the image data and the
minus setting stretches it.
Each setting changes by
0.1%
3-6
00001111
:
00001000
:
00000001
00000000
10000001
:
10000100
:
10001000
:
10001101
:
10001111
Settings
+1.5 %
+0.8 %
+0.1 %
0 %  Standard
-0.1 %
-0.4 %
-0.8 %
-1.3 %  Initial setting
-1.5 %
Machine Parameter 013
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Leading edge document
margin adjustment (ADF)
Switch
76543210
127 steps01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
10001000
:
10010000
:
10100000
:
10011111
:
-127steps 11111111
Adjusts the leading edge
margin from Document
Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start
of scanning the position.
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi
(0.0847 mm)
Note: These values
are factory set and should
not be adjusted unless
instructed by a Muratec
technical representative.
Settings
+10.76 mm
+2.71 mm
+1.36 mm
+0.68mm
15.6 mm
-0.68 mm
-1.36 mm
-2.71 mm
-5.34 mm  Initial setting
-10.76 mm
Machine Parameter 014
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Trailing edge document
margin adjustment (ADF)
Switch
76543210
Settings
127 steps01111111 +10.76 mm
:
00100000 +2.71 mm
:
00010000 +1.36 mm
:
00010011 +0.93 mm  Initial setting
:
00001000 +0.68mm
:
00000000 15.6 mm
:
10001000 -0.68 mm
:
10010000 -1.36 mm
:
10100000 -2.71 mm
:
-127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm
Adjusts document feed after
the trailing edge of a document passes Document
Sensor 2 (DS2).
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi
(0.0847 mm)
Note: These values
are factory set and should
not be adjusted unless
instructed by a Muratec
technical representative.
3-7
Machine Parameter 015
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
FBS scanner registration
adjustment (Horizontal)
Switch
Adjusts the start point to
scan the document.
The plus setting increases
the left margin and the minus
setting decreases it.
1 step = 2 / 600 dpi
(0.0847 mm)
Note: These values
are factory set and should
not be adjusted unless
instructed by a Muratec
technical representative.
76543210
127 steps01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
10000010
:
10001000
:
10010000
:
10100000
:
-127steps 11111111
Settings
+10.76 mm
+2.71 mm
+1.36 mm
+0.68mm
0 mm
-0.17 mm  Initial setting
-0.68 mm
-1.36 mm
-2.71 mm
-10.76 mm
Machine Parameter 016
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Adjustment of the scanning
stretching and squeezing for
FBS.
(Horizontal)
Switch 76543210
The plus setting stretches
the image data and the
minus setting squeezes it.
Each setting changes by
0.1%
3-8
00001111
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000010
00000001
00000000
10000001
10000010
:
10000100
:
10001000
:
10001111
Settings
+1.5 %
+0.8 %
+0.4 %
+0.2 %
+0.1 %
0 %  Initial setting
-0.1 %
-0.2 %
-0.4 %
-0.8 %
-1.5 %
Machine Parameter 017
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Adjustment of the scanning
stretching and squeezing for
FBS.
(Vertical)
Switch 76543210
The plus setting squeezes
the image data and the
minus setting stretches it.
Each setting changes by
0.1%
00001111
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000010
00000001
00000000
10000001
10000010
:
10000100
:
10001000
:
10001111
Settings
+1.5 %
+0.8 %
+0.4 %
+0.2 %
+0.1 %
0%
-0.1 %
-0.2 %
-0.4 %  Initial setting
-0.8 %
-1.5 %
Machine Parameter 018
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Leading edge document
margin adjustment For FBS
Switch 76543210
Adjusts the leading edge
margin after Home Sensor
OFF to the start of scanning
the position.
Each setting changes
by 0.0212 mm.
Note: These values are
factory set and should not be
adjusted unless instructed by
a Muratec technical
representative.
127steps 01111111
:
64 steps 01000000
:
32 steps 00100000
:
16 steps 00010000
:
8 steps 00001000
:
00000000
:
-8 steps 10001000
:
-12 steps 10001100
:
-16 steps 10010000
:
-32 steps 10100000
:
-64 steps 11000000
:
-127steps11111111
Machine Parameter 019 — Factory use only
3-9
Settings
+2.70 mm
+1.36 mm
+0.68 mm
+0.34 mm
+0.17 mm
21.85 mm
-0.17 mm
-0.25 mm  Initial setting
-0.34 mm
-0.68mm
-1.36 mm
-2.70mm
Machine Parameter 020
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Mirror carriage standby
position adjustment
Switch 76543210
127steps
80 steps
50 steps
20 steps
10 steps
3 steps
2 steps
1 step
Adjusts the number of the
steps from the home sensor
of the mirror carriage OFF
to the standby position.
1 step = 0.0212 mm
Note: These values
are factory set and should
not be adjusted unless
instructed by a Muratec
technical representative.
01111111
:
01010000
:
00110010
:
00010100
:
00001010
:
00000011
00000010
00000001
00000000
Settings
+17.89 mm
+11.26 mm
+7.04 mm
+2.82 mm
+1.41 mm
+0.42 mm
+0.28 mm
+0.14 mm
9.15 mm
When Switch 7 is “1”, it means “ - ”. For example,
“10000001” means “-0.14 mm”.
Machine Parameter 021
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Mirror carriage transfer mode
position adjustment
Adjusts the number of the
steps from the home sensor
of the mirror carriage OFF
to the transfer mode position.
1 step = 0.0212 mm
Switch 76543210
127steps 01111111
:
64 steps 01000000
:
32 steps 00100000
:
16 steps 00010000
:
8 steps 00001000
:
00000000
:
-8 steps 10001000
:
-16 steps 10010000
:
-32 steps 10100000
:
-64 steps 11000000
:
-127steps 11111111
Machine Parameter 022 ~ 024 — Factory use only
3-10
Settings
+2.70 mm
+1.36 mm
+0.68 mm
+0.34 mm
+0.17 mm
21.5 mm  Initial setting
-0.17 mm
-0.34 mm
-0.68mm
-1.36 mm
-2.70mm
Machine Parameter 025
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Background level adjustment
starting position
Adjusts the number of the
steps from the home sensor
of the mirror carriage OFF
to the background level
adjusting start position.
1 step = 0.0212 mm
Switch 76543210
127steps 01111111
:
64 steps01000000
:
32 steps 00100000
:
16 steps 00010000
:
8 steps 00001000
:
00000000
:
-8 steps 10001000
:
-16 steps 10010000
:
-32 steps 10100000
:
-64 steps 11000000
:
-127steps 11111111
Machine Parameter 026 ~ 029 — Factory use only
3-11
Settings
+2.70 mm
+1.36 mm
+0.68 mm
+0.34 mm
+0.17 mm
15.35 mm  Initial setting
-0.17 mm
-0.34 mm
-0.68mm
-1.36 mm
-2.70mm
Machine Parameter 030
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Scanning density
level adjustment in normal
resolution.
Switch 76543210
01111111 Darkest setting
:
00001000
:
00000000  Initial setting
:
10001000
:
11111111 Lightest setting
Machine Parameter 031
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Scanning density level
adjustment in fine resolution.
Switch 76543210
01111111 Darkest setting
:
00001000
:
00000000  Initial setting
:
10001000
:
11111111 Lightest setting
Machine Parameter 032
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Scanning density level
adjustment in super-fine
resolution.
Usage/Comments
Switch 76543210
01111111 Darkest setting
:
00001000
:
00000000  Initial setting
:
10001000
:
11111111 Lightest setting
3-12
Machine Parameter 033
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Scanning density level
adjustment in hyper-fine
resolution.
Switch 76543210
01111111 Darkest setting
:
00001000
:
00000000  Initial setting
:
10001000
:
11111111 Lightest setting
Machine Parameter 034
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Scanning density level
adjustment in hyper-fine
(600dpi x 600dpi) resolution.
Switch 76543210
01111111 Darkest setting
:
00001000
:
00000000  Initial setting
:
10001000
:
11111111 Lightest setting
Machine Parameter 035 ~ 089 — Factory use only
3-13
Machine Parameter 090
7
Initial
Setting
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Able to use the bypass tray
in normal fax reception.
0: Yes
1: No
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Able to use the 2nd cassette
in normal fax reception.
0: Yes
1: No
Able to use the 1st cassette
in normal fax reception.
0: Yes
1: No
When set to “1”, the cassette or the bypass tray is
not available in normal fax reception.
Note: This setting does not affect the duplex fax
reception. See Machine Parameter 092 for the
duplex fax reception.
Machine Parameter 091 — Factory use only
Machine Parameter 092
7
Initial
Setting
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Able to use the bypass tray
in duplex fax reception.
0: Yes
1: No
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Able to use the 2nd cassette
in duplex fax reception.
0: Yes
1: No
Able to use the 1st cassette
in duplex fax reception.
0: Yes
1: No
When set to “1”, the cassette or the bypass tray is
not available in duplex fax reception.
Note: A duplex printing unit is required for duplex
reception.
Note: This setting does not affect the normal fax
reception. See Machine Parameter 090 for the
normal fax reception.
Machine Parameter 093 ~ 099 — Factory use only
3-14
Machine Parameter 100
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer registration
adjustment (Horizontal) at
the 1st cassette for printing.
See table on page 3-21.
Adjusts the start point to
print.
The plus setting increases
the left margin and the minus
setting decreases it.
Note: Set this switch after setting the margin to
“0 mm” in Unique Switch 52. Then, after setting
this switch, set the margin to the initial setting (4
mm) in Unique Switch 52.
The setting changes by
16 dots (0.6773 mm).
Machine Parameter 101
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at
the 2nd cassette for printing.
Adjusts the start point to
print.
The plus setting increases
the left margin and the minus
setting decreases it.
See table on page 3-21.
Note: Set this switch after setting the margin to
“0 mm” in Unique Switch 52. Then, after setting
this switch, set the margin to the initial setting (4
mm) in Unique Switch 52.
The setting changes by
16 dots (0.6773 mm).
Machine Parameter 102 ~ 106 — Factory use only
Machine Parameter 107
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer registration
adjustment (Horizontal) at
the Bypass tray for printing.
See table on page 3-21.
Note: Set this switch after setting the margin to
“0 mm” in Unique Switch 52. Then, after setting
this switch, set the margin to the initial setting (4
mm) in Unique Switch 52.
Adjusts the start point to
print.
The plus setting increases
the left margin and the minus
setting decreases it.
The setting changes by
16 dots (0.6773 mm).
3-15
Machine Parameter 108
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer registration
adjustment (Horizontal) for
duplex printing cassette.
See table on page 3-21.
Adjusts the start point to
print.
The plus setting increases
the left margin and the minus
setting decreases it.
Note: Set this switch after setting the margin to
“0 mm” in Unique Switch 52. Then, after setting
this switch, set the margin to the initial setting (4
mm) in Unique Switch 52.
The setting changes by
16 dots (0.6773 mm).
Machine Parameter 109 ~ 139 — Factory use only
3-16
Machine Parameter 140
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer registration
adjustment.
See table on page 3-21.
Adjusts the left margin at the
1st cassette for printing.
The plus setting increases
the left margin and the minus
setting decreases it.
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top /
bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. If you want to
adjust only left margin, adjust it in this switch.
The setting changes by
16 dots (0.6773 mm).
Machine Parameter 141
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer registration
adjustment.
See table on page 3-21.
Adjusts the left margin at the
2nd cassette for printing.
The plus setting increases
the left margin and the minus
setting decreases it.
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top /
bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. If you want to
adjust only left margin, adjust it in this switch.
The setting changes by
16 dots (0.6773 mm).
Machine Parameter 142 ~ 146 — Factory use only
3-17
Machine Parameter 147
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer registration
adjustment.
See table on page 3-21.
Adjusts the left margin at the
Bypass tray for printing.
The plus setting increases
the left margin and the minus
setting decreases it.
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top /
bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. If you want to
adjust only left margin, adjust it in this switch.
The setting changes by
16 dots (0.6773 mm).
Machine Parameter 148
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer registration
adjustment.
See table on page 3-21.
Adjusts the left margin for
duplex printing cassette.
The plus setting increases
the left margin and the minus
setting decreases it.
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top /
bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. If you want to
adjust only left margin, adjust it in this switch.
The setting changes by
16 dots (0.6773 mm).
Machine Parameter 149 ~ 159 — Factory use only
3-18
Machine Parameter 160
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer registration
adjustment.
See table on page 3-21.
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top /
bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. If you want to
adjust only right margin, adjust it in this switch.
Adjusts the right margin at
the 1st cassette for printing.
The plus setting decreases
the right margin and the
minus setting increases it.
The setting changes by
16 dots (0.6773 mm).
Machine Parameter 161
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer registration
adjustment.
See table on page 3-21.
Adjusts the right margin at
the 2nd cassette for printing.
The plus setting decreases
the right margin and the
minus setting increases it.
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top /
bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. If you want to
adjust only right margin, adjust it in this switch.
The setting changes by
16 dots (0.6773 mm).
Machine Parameter 162 ~ 166 — Factory use only
3-19
Machine Parameter 167
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
Adjust
Printer registration
adjustment.
Adjusts the right margin at
the Bypass tray for printing.
The plus setting decreases
the right margin and the
minus setting increases it.
Usage/Comments
See table on page 3-21.
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top /
bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. If you want to
adjust only right margin, adjust it in this switch.
The setting changes by
16 dots (0.6773 mm).
Machine Parameter 168
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Adjust
Printer registration
adjustment.
Adjusts the right margin for
duplex printing cassette.
The plus setting decreases
the right margin and the
minus setting increases it.
Usage/Comments
See table on page 3-21.
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top /
bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. If you want to
adjust only right margin, adjust it in this switch.
The setting changes by
16 dots (0.6773 mm).
Machine Parameter 169 ~ 179 — Factory use only
3-20
Adjusting the print margin
Switch(76543210)
01111111
01111110
01100101
01100110
01011111
01011000
01010010
01001011
01000100
00111101
00110111
0011000
00101001
00010010
00011011
00010101
00001111
00000111
00000000
11110011
11101100
11100101
11011110
11011000
11010001
11001010
11000011
10111101
10110110
10101111
10101000
10100010
10011011
10010100
10010011
10000110
10000000
Settings
+12.87mm
+11.52 mm
+10.84 mm
+10.16 mm
+9.48 mm
+8.81 mm
+8.13 mm
+7.45 mm
+6.77 mm
+6.10 mm
+5.42 mm
+4.74 mm
+4.06 mm
+3.39 mm
+2.71 mm
+2.03 mm
+1.36 mm
+0.68 mm
0 mm
-0.68 mm
-1.36 mm
-2.03 mm
-2.71 mm
-3.39 mm
-4.06 mm
-4.74 mm
-5.42 mm
-6.10 mm
-6.77 mm
-7.45 mm
-8.13 mm
-8.81 mm
-9.48 mm
-10.16 mm
-10.84 mm
-11.52 mm
-12.87 mm
3-21
Machine Parameter 180
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer registration
adjustment (Vertical) at the
1st cassette for printing.
Adjusts the start point to
print.
The plus setting increases
the top margin and the minus
setting decreases it.
Each setting changes by
0.1 mm.
Switch
76543210
Settings
127 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 steps
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm  Initial setting
Note: Set this switch after setting the margin to
“0 mm” in Unique Switch 52. Then, after setting this
switch, set the margin to the initial setting (4 mm) in
Unique Switch 52.
Machine Parameter 181
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer registration
adjustment (Vertical) at the
2nd cassette for printing.
Adjusts the start point to
print.
The plus setting increases
the top margin and the minus
setting decreases it.
Each setting changes by
0.1 mm.
Switch
76543210
Settings
127 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 steps
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm  Initial setting
Note: Set this switch after setting the margin to
“0 mm” in Unique Switch 52. Then, after setting this
switch, set the margin to the initial setting (4 mm) in
Unique Switch 52.
3-22
Machine Parameter 182 ~ 186 — Factory use only
Machine Parameter 187
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer registration
adjustment (Vertical) at the
Bypass tray for printing.
Adjusts the start point to
print.
The plus setting increases
the top margin and the minus
setting decreases it.
Each setting changes by
0.1 mm.
Switch
76543210
Settings
127 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 steps
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm  Initial setting
Note: Set this switch after setting the margin to
“0 mm” in Unique Switch 052. Then, after setting
this switch, set the margin to the initial setting (4
mm) in Unique Switch 52.
Machine Parameter 188
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer registration
adjustment (Vertical) for
duplex printing cassette.
Adjusts the start point to
print.
The plus setting increases
the top margin and the minus
setting decreases it.
Each setting changes by
0.1 mm.
Switch
76543210
Settings
127 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 steps
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm  Initial setting
Note: Set this switch after setting the margin to
“0 mm” in Unique Switch 052. Then, after setting
this switch, set the margin to the initial setting (4
mm) in Unique Switch 52.
Machine Parameter 189 ~ 219 — Factory use only
3-23
Machine Parameter 220
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer registration
adjustment.
Adjusts the top margin at the
1st cassette for printing.
The plus setting increases
the top margin and the minus
setting decreases it.
Each setting changes by
0.1 mm.
Switch
76543210
Settings
127 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 steps
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
4 mm  Initial setting
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top /
bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. If you want to
adjust only top margin, adjust it in this switch.
Machine Parameter 221
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer registration
adjustment.
Adjusts the top margin at the
2nd cassette for printing.
The plus setting increases
the top margin and the minus
setting decreases it.
Each setting changes by
0.1 mm.
Switch
76543210
Settings
127 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 steps
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
4 mm  Initial setting
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top /
bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. If you want to
adjust only top margin, adjust it in this switch.
3-24
Machine Parameter 222 ~ 226 — Factory use only
Machine Parameter 227
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer registration
adjustment.
Adjusts the top margin at the
Bypass tray for printing.
The plus setting increases
the top margin and the minus
setting decreases it.
Each setting changes by
0.1 mm.
Switch
76543210
Settings
127 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 steps
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
4 mm  Initial setting
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top /
bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. If you want to
adjust only top margin, adjust it in this switch.
Machine Parameter 228
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer registration
adjustment.
Adjusts the top margin for
duplex printing cassette.
The plus setting increases
the top margin and the minus
setting decreases it.
Each setting changes by
0.1 mm.
Switch
76543210
Settings
127 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 steps
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
4 mm  Initial setting
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top /
bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. If you want to
adjust only top margin, adjust it in this switch.
Machine Parameter 229 ~ 239 — Factory use only
3-25
Machine Parameter 240
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer registration
adjustment.
Switch
Adjusts the bottom margin at
the 1st cassette for printing.
The plus setting decreases
the bottom margin and the
minus setting increases it.
Each setting changes by
0.1 mm.
127 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 steps
-8 steps
-16 steps
-128 steps
76543210
Settings
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
4 mm  Initial setting
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.8 mm
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top /
bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. If you want to
adjust only bottom margin, adjust it in this switch.
Machine Parameter 241
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer registration
adjustment.
Switch
Adjusts the bottom margin at
the 2nd cassette for printing.
The plus setting decreases
the bottom margin and the
minus setting increases it.
Each setting changes by
0.1 mm.
127 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 steps
-8 steps
-16 steps
-128 steps
76543210
Settings
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
4 mm  Initial setting
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.8 mm
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top /
bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. If you want to
adjust only bottom margin, adjust it in this switch.
3-26
Machine Parameter 242 ~ 246 — Factory use only
Machine Parameter 247
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer registration
adjustment.
Switch
Adjusts the bottom margin at
the Bypass tray for printing.
The plus setting decreases
the bottom margin and the
minus setting increases it.
Each setting changes by
0.1 mm.
127 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 steps
-8 steps
-16 steps
-128 steps
76543210
Settings
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
4 mm  Initial setting
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.8 mm
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top /
bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. If you want to
adjust only bottom margin, adjust it in this switch.
Machine Parameter 248
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer registration
adjustment.
Switch
Adjusts the top margin for
duplex printing cassette.
The plus setting increases
the top margin and the minus
setting decreases it.
Each setting changes by
0.1 mm.
127 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 steps
-8 steps
-16 steps
-128 steps
76543210
Settings
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
4 mm  Initial setting
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.8 mm
Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top /
bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. If you want to
adjust only top margin, adjust it in this switch.
Machine Parameter 249 ~ 284 — Factory use only
3-27
Machine Parameter 285
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Current adjustment for
standard paper front side
The plus setting increases
the current and the minus
setting decreases it.
Each setting changes by
0.11 mA.
Usage/Comments
When transfer problems occur, adjust this parameter.
Switch
76543210
Settings
31 steps
8 steps
-1 steps
-2 steps
-8 steps
-31 steps
00011111
:
00001000
:
00000000
10000001
10000010
:
10001000
:
10011111
+3.41 mA
+0.88 mA
0 mA  Initial setting
-0.11 mA
-0.22 mA
-0.88 mA
-3.41 mA
When Switch 7 is “1”, it means “ - ”. For example,
“10000001” means “-0.11 mA”.
Note:
• Adjusting them too many steps affect the print
quality. Just try to decrease one or two steps at
first.
• DO NOT adjust the steps larger than 31 or
smaller than -31.
Machine Parameter 286
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Current adjustment for
envelops
The plus setting increases
the current and the minus
setting decreases it.
Each setting changes by
0.11 mA.
Usage/Comments
When transfer problems occur, adjust this
parameter.
Switch
76543210
Settings
31 steps
8 steps
-1 steps
-2 steps
-8 steps
-31 steps
00011111
:
00001000
:
00000000
10000001
10000010
:
10001000
:
10011111
+3.41 mA
+0.88 mA
0 mA  Initial setting
-0.11 mA
-0.22 mA
-0.88 mA
-3.41 mA
When Switch 7 is “1”, it means “ - ”. For example,
“10000001” means “-0.11 mA”.
Note:
• Adjusting them too many steps affect the print
quality. Just try to decrease one or two steps at
first.
• DO NOT adjust the steps larger than 31 or
smaller than -31.
3-28
Machine Parameter 287
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Current adjustment for
postcards
The plus setting increases
the current and the minus
setting decreases it.
Each setting changes by
0.11 mA.
Usage/Comments
When transfer problems occur, adjust this
parameter.
Switch
76543210
Settings
31 steps
8 steps
-1 steps
-2 steps
-8 steps
-31 steps
00011111
:
00001000
:
00000000
10000001
10000010
:
10001000
:
10011111
+3.41 mA
+0.88 mA
0 mA  Initial setting
-0.11 mA
-0.22 mA
-0.88 mA
-3.41 mA
When Switch 7 is “1”, it means “ - ”. For example,
“10000001” means “-0.11 mA”.
Note:
• Adjusting them too many steps affect the print
quality. Just try to decrease one or two steps at
first.
• DO NOT adjust the steps larger than 31 or
smaller than -31.
Machine Parameter 288
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Current adjustment for
transparency sheets (OHP)
The plus setting increases
the current and the minus
setting decreases it.
Each setting changes by
0.11 mA.
Usage/Comments
When transfer problems occur, adjust
this parameter.
Switch
76543210
Settings
31 steps
8 steps
-1 steps
-2 steps
-8 steps
-31 steps
00011111
:
00001000
:
00000000
10000001
10000010
:
10001000
:
10011111
+3.41 mA
+0.88 mA
0 mA  Initial setting
-0.11 mA
-0.22 mA
-0.88 mA
-3.41 mA
When Switch 7 is “1”, it means “ - ”. For example,
“10000001” means “-0.11 mA”.
Note:
• Adjusting them too many steps affect the print
quality. Just try to decrease one or two steps at
first.
• DO NOT adjust the steps larger than 31 or
smaller than -31.
3-29
Machine Parameter 289
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Current adjustment for
standard paper back side
The plus setting increases
the current and the minus
setting decreases it.
Each setting changes by
0.11 mA.
Usage/Comments
When transfer problems occur, adjust this parameter.
Switch
76543210
Settings
31 steps
8 steps
-1 steps
-2 steps
-8 steps
-31 steps
00011111
:
00001000
:
00000000
10000001
10000010
:
10001000
:
10011111
+3.41 mA
+0.88 mA
0 mA  Initial setting
-0.11 mA
-0.22 mA
-0.88 mA
-3.41 mA
When Switch 7 is “1”, it means “ - ”. For example,
“10000001” means “-0.11 mA”.
Note:
• Adjusting them too many steps affect the print
quality. Just try to decrease one or two steps at
first.
• DO NOT adjust the steps larger than 31 or
smaller than -31. .
Machine Parameter 290 ~ 459 — Factory use only
3-30
Machine Parameter 460
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
White balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Copy/Black and white scan
mode
Resolution: 600x600dpi
Document type: Text
16 steps
8 steps
4 steps
0 step
-4 step
-8 step
-16step
00010000 + Darkest setting
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000  Standard
:
10000100
:
10001000
:
10010000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
460, 493(common steps for copy steps), and 492
(ADF only). However the steps cannot exceed –16
or 16.
Machine Parameter 461
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
White balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Copy/Black and white scan
mode
Resolution: 600x600dpi
Document type: Photo/Text
Contrast: Dark, Darker, Light,
Lighter
16 steps
8 steps
4 steps
0 step
-4 step
-8 step
-16step
00010000 + Darkest setting
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000  Standard
:
10000100
:
10001000
:
10010000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
461, 493(common steps for copy steps), and 492
(ADF only). However the steps cannot exceed –16
or 16.
3-31
Machine Parameter 462
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
White balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Copy/Black and white scan
mode
Resolution: 600x600dpi
Document type: Photo/Text
Contrast: Normal
16 steps
8 steps
4 steps
0 step
-4 step
-8 step
-16step
00010000 + Darkest setting
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000  Standard
:
10000100
:
10001000
:
10010000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
462, 493(common steps for copy steps), and 492
(ADF only). However the steps cannot exceed –16
or 16.
Machine Parameter 463
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
White balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Copy/Black and white scan
mode
Resolution: 600x600dpi
Document type: Photo
16 steps
8 steps
4 steps
0 step
-4 step
-8 step
-16step
00010000 + Darkest setting
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000  Standard
:
10000100
:
10001000
:
10010000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
463, 493(common steps for copy steps), and 492
(ADF only). However the steps cannot exceed –16
or 16.
3-32
Machine Parameter 464
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
White balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Copy mode
Resolution: 600x300dpi
Document type: Text
16 steps
8 steps
4 steps
0 step
-4 step
-8 step
-16step
00010000 + Darkest setting
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000  Standard
:
10000100
:
10001000
:
10010000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
464, 493(common steps for copy steps), and 492
(ADF only). However the steps cannot exceed –16
or 16.
Machine Parameter 465
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
White balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Copy mode
Resolution: 600x300dpi
Document type: Photo/Text
Contrast: Dark, Darker, Light,
Lighter
16 steps
8 steps
4 steps
0 step
-4 step
-8 step
-16step
00010000 + Darkest setting
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000  Standard
:
10000100
:
10001000
:
10010000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
465, 493(common steps for copy steps), and 492
(ADF only). However the steps cannot exceed –16
or 16.
3-33
Machine Parameter 466
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
White balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Copy mode
Resolution: 600x300dpi
Document type: Photo/Text
Contrast: Normal
16 steps
8 steps
4 steps
0 step
-4 step
-8 step
-16step
00010000 + Darkest setting
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000  Standard
:
10000100
:
10001000
:
10010000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
466, 493(common steps for copy steps), and 492
(ADF only). However the steps cannot exceed –16
or 16.
Machine Parameter 467
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
White balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Copy mode
Resolution: 600x300dpi
Document type: Photo
16 steps
8 steps
4 steps
0 step
-4 step
-8 step
-16step
00010000 + Darkest setting
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000  Standard
:
10000100
:
10000100
:
10000100 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
467, 493(common steps for copy steps), and 492
(ADF only). However the steps cannot exceed –16
or 16.
3-34
Machine Parameter 468
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
White balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Black and White scan
Resolution: 300x300 dpi,
200x200dpi
Document type: Text
16 steps
8 steps
4 steps
0 step
-4 step
-8 step
-16step
00010000 + Darkest setting
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000  Standard
:
10000100
:
10001000
:
10010000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
464 and 492 (ADF only). However the steps cannot
exceed –16 or 16.
Machine Parameter 469
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
White balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Black and White scan
Resolution: 300x300 dpi,
200x200dpi
Document type: Photo/Text
Contrast: Dark, Darker, Light,
Lighter
16 steps
8 steps
4 steps
0 step
-4 step
-8 step
-16step
00010000 + Darkest setting
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000  Standard
:
10000100
:
10001000
:
10010000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
469 and 492 (ADF only). However the steps cannot
exceed –16 or 16.
3-35
Machine Parameter 470
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
White balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Black and White scan
Resolution: 300x300 dpi,
200x200dpi
Document type: Photo/Text
Contrast: Normal
16 steps
8 steps
4 steps
0 step
-4 step
-8 step
-16step
00010000 + Darkest setting
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000  Standard
:
10000100
:
10001000
:
10010000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
470 and 492 (ADF only). However the steps cannot
exceed –16 or 16.
Machine Parameter 471
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
White balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Black and White scan
Resolution: 300x300 dpi,
200x200dpi
Document type: Photo
16 steps
8 steps
4 steps
0 step
-4 step
-8 step
-16step
00010000 + Darkest setting
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000  Standard
:
10000100
:
10001000
:
10010000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
471 and 492 (ADF only). However the steps cannot
exceed –16 or 16.
3-36
Machine Parameter 472
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
White balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Color scan
Resolution: All
16 steps
8 steps
4 steps
0 step
-4 step
-8 step
-16step
00010000 + Darkest setting
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000  Standard
:
10000100
:
10001000
:
10010000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
472 and 492 (ADF only). However the steps cannot
exceed –16 or 16.
Machine Parameter 473
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
White balance adjustment
Grayscale scan
Resolution: All
Usage/Comments
Switch
76543210
16 steps
8 steps
4 steps
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
0 step
00000000  Standard
:
-4 step
-8 step
-16step
10000100
:
10001000
:
10010000 Lightest setting
+ Darkest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
473 and 492 (ADF only). However the steps cannot
exceed –16 or 16.
3-37
Machine Parameter 474
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
White balance adjustment
Fax mode
Document type: Normal,
Fine, Super fine
Usage/Comments
Switch
76543210
16 steps
8 steps
4 steps
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
0 step
00000000  Standard
:
-4 step
-8 step
-16step
10000100
:
10001000
:
10010000 Lightest setting
+ Darkest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
474 and 492 (ADF only). However the steps cannot
exceed –16 or 16.
Machine Parameter 475
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
White balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Fax mode
Document type: Gray scale
16 steps
8 steps
4 steps
0 step
-4 step
-8 step
-16step
00010000 + Darkest setting
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000  Standard
:
10000100
:
10001000
:
10010000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
475 and 492 (ADF only). However the steps cannot
exceed –16 or 16.
3-38
Machine Parameter 476
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Black balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Copy/Black and white scan
mode
Resolution: 600x600dpi
Document type: Text
64 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 step
0 step
01000000 + Darkest setting
:
00100000
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
476 and 494 (ADF only). However the steps cannot
exceed 64.
Machine Parameter 477
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Black balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Copy/Black and white scan
mode
Resolution: 600x600dpi
Document type: Photo/Text
Contrast: Dark, Darker, Light,
Lighter
64 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 step
0 step
01000000 + Darkest setting
:
00100000
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
476 and 494 (ADF only). However the steps cannot
exceed 64.
3-39
Machine Parameter 478
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
Adjust
Black balance adjustment
Copy/Black and white scan
mode
Resolution: 600x600dpi
Document type: Photo/Text
Contrast: Normal
Usage/Comments
Switch
76543210
64 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 step
0 step
01000000 + Darkest setting
:
00100000
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
478 and 494 (ADF only). However the steps cannot
exceed 64.
Machine Parameter 479
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Black balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Copy/Black and white scan
mode
Resolution: 600x600dpi
Document type: Photo
64 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 step
0 step
01000000 + Darkest setting
:
00100000
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
479 and 494 (ADF only). However the steps cannot
exceed 64.
3-40
Machine Parameter 480
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Black balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Copy mode
Resolution: 600x300dpi
Document type: Text
64 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 step
0 step
01000000 + Darkest setting
:
00100000
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
480 and 494 (ADF only). However the steps cannot
exceed 64.
Machine Parameter 481
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Black balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Copy mode
Resolution: 600x300dpi
Document type: Photo/Text
Contrast: Dark, Darker, Light,
Lighter
64 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 step
0 step
01000000 + Darkest setting
:
00100000
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
481 and 494 (ADF only). However the steps cannot
exceed 64.
3-41
Machine Parameter 482
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Black balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Copy mode
Resolution: 600x300dpi
Document type: Photo/Text
Contrast: Normal
64 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 step
0 step
01000000 + Darkest setting
:
00100000
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
482 and 494 (ADF only). However the steps cannot
exceed 64.
Machine Parameter 483
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Black balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Copy mode
Resolution: 600x300dpi
Document type: Photo
64 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 step
0 step
01000000 + Darkest setting
:
00100000
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
483 and 494 (ADF only). However the steps cannot
exceed 64.
Machine Parameter 484
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Black balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Black and White scan
Resolution: 300x300 dpi,
200x200dpi
Document type: Text
64 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 step
0 step
01000000 + Darkest setting
:
00100000
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
484 and 494 (ADF only). However the steps cannot
exceed 64.
3-42
Machine Parameter 485
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Black balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Black and White scan
Resolution: 300x300 dpi,
200x200dpi
Document type: Photo/Text
Contrast: Dark, Darker, Light,
Lighter
64 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 step
0 step
01000000 + Darkest setting
:
00100000
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
485 and 494 (ADF only). However the steps cannot
exceed 64.
Machine Parameter 486
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Black balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Black and White scan
Resolution: 300x300 dpi,
200x200dpi
Document type: Photo/Text
Contrast: Normal
64 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 step
0 step
01000000 + Darkest setting
:
00100000
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
486 and 494 (ADF only). However the steps cannot
exceed 64.
3-43
Machine Parameter 487
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Black balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Black and White scan
Resolution: 300x300 dpi,
200x200dpi
Document type: Photo
64 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 step
0 step
01000000 + Darkest setting
:
00100000
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
487 and 494 (ADF only). However the steps cannot
exceed 64.
Machine Parameter 488
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Black balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Grayscale scan
Resolution: All
64 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 step
0 step
01000000 + Darkest setting
:
00100000
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
488 and 495 (ADF only). However the steps cannot
exceed 64.
Machine Parameter 489
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Black balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Fax mode
Document type: Gray scale
Contrast: Dark, Darker, Light,
Lighter
64 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 step
0 step
01000000 + Darkest setting
:
00100000
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
489 and 494 (ADF only). However the steps cannot
exceed 64.
3-44
Machine Parameter 490
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Black balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
Fax mode
Document type: Gray scale
Contrast: Normal
64 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 step
0 step
01000000 + Darkest setting
:
00100000
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of Machine parameter
490 and 494 (ADF only). However the steps cannot
exceed 64.
Machine Parameter 491 — Factory use only
Machine Parameter 492
Switch
Initial
Setting
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
Adjust
White balance adjustment
For ADF scan (common)
Copy/Scan/Fax modes
Usage/Comments
This parameter changes the white balance for ADF
scanning for all modes.
To change the settings for Copy/Scan/Fax mode
respectively, refer to Machine parameters from 460
to 475.
Switch
76543210
16 steps
8 steps
4 steps
0 step
-4 step
-8 step
-16step
00010000 + Darkest setting
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000  Standard
:
10000100
:
10001000
:
10010000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of each respective
Machine parameter, 493(copy mode only) and 492.
However the steps cannot exceed –16 or 16.
3-45
Machine Parameter 493
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
White balance adjustment
For Copy modes and
Black and White 600dpi scan
mode
This parameter changes the white balance for all
copy modes, and black and white 600dpi scan
mode.
To change the settings for Copy/Scan/Fax mode
respectively, refer to Machine parameters from 460
to 475.
Switch
76543210
16 steps
8 steps
4 steps
0 step
-4 step
-8 step
-16step
00010000 + Darkest setting
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000  Standard
:
10000100
:
10001000
:
10010000 Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of each respective
Machine parameter, 493 and 492 (ADF only).
However the steps cannot exceed –16 or 16.
Machine Parameter 494
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Black balance adjustment
For ADF scan
Copy/Scan/Fax modes
(For grayscale scan, refer
machine parameter 495)
Usage/Comments
This parameter changes the black balance for ADF
scanning for all modes except grayscale scan.
To change the settings for Copy/Scan/Fax mode
respectively, refer to Machine parameters from 476
to 489.
Switch
63 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 step
0 step
543210
111111
:
100000
:
001000
:
000100
:
000000
+ Darkest setting
Lightest setting
The total step is the sum of each respective
Machine parameter and 494. However the steps
cannot exceed 63.
3-46
Machine Parameter 495
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Black balance adjustment
For ADF scan in grayscale
Usage/Comments
This parameter changes the black balance for ADF
scanning in grayscale.
To change the settings for FBS scan, refer to
Machine parameter 488.
Switch
63 steps
32 steps
16 steps
8 step
0 step
543210
111111
:
100000
:
001000
:
000100
:
000000
+ Darkest setting
Lightest setting
The total step is the sum Machine parameter 488
and 495. However the steps cannot exceed 63.
3-47
About the white balance and black balance adjustment
(Machine parameters 460 to 495)
White balance adjustment for FBS : A+B
(-16 steps
A+B
White balance adjustment for ADF : A+B+C
(-16 steps
A+B+C
Mode
Document
type
Resolution
Text
Copy/Scan
600x600
Photo/Text
Photo
Text
Copy
600x300
Photo/Text
Photo
Text
Scan
300x300
200x200
—
Fax
—
Photo/Text
Photo
Color
Grayscale
Normal/ Fine/
Super fine
Grayscale
Contrast
—
Other than Normal
Normal
—
—
Other than Normal
Normal
—
—
Other than Normal
Normal
—
—
—
—
—
Black level adjustment for FBS : A
(0 step
A
Black level adjustment for ADF : A+B
(0 step
A+B
Mode
Copy/Scan
Resolution
600x600
Document
type
Text
Photo/Text
Photo
Text
Copy
600x300
Photo/Text
Photo
Text
300x300
200x200
Scan
—
Fax
—
16 steps)
16 steps)
Machine parameter for white balance
A
B
C
460
461
462
463
493
464
465
466
467
492
468
(ADF only)
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
64 steps)
64 steps)
Contrast
—
Other than Normal
Normal
—
—
Other than Normal
Normal
—
—
Machine parameter for black balance
A
B
476
477
478
479
480
481
494
482
(ADF only)
483
484
Other than Normal
485
Photo
Color
Normal
—
—
486
487
Grayscale
—
488
Normal/ Fine/
Super fine
—
Grayscale
Other than Normal
Normal
Photo/Text
3-48
489
490
495
(ADF only)
494
(ADF only)
3.3 Memory Switch Adjustment
3.3.1 Setting the Memory Switches
These switches are used to program internal machine parameters. The primary back up battery
maintains these settings if power are lost.
1.From standby, press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <1>.
2. Press [Mem Switch Edit].
3. Call up the desired switch by pressing [ ] or [ ], or by pressing the numeric keypad.
4. Select the desired switch by pressing the box.
5. To navigate through the memory switch settings:
• The bits are ranged from 7 (left) to 0 (right).
• Press[
]or[
]of the cursor key to move the cursor.
• Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad, or[
] or[
], to change the bit value.
• Press <Enter> to save the setting of the displayed memory switch and return to the memory
switch edit screen.
• Press <Reset> not to save the setting of the displayed memory switch.
6. If you want to set other memory switches, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7.
7. Press <Reset> to return the machine to standby.
Note: You can confirm the initial setting of each Memory Switch by the Memory Switches List.
The memory switch List will be printed by pressing <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <0>.
3-49
3.3.2 Clearing the Memory Switches
Resets the memory switches to factory defaults.
1. From standby, press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <1>.
2. Press [Mem Switch Clear].
3. Press [Yes]. The memory switches will reset to factory defaults.
Note: To finish the operation without clearing the switches, press [No].
4. Press <Reset> to return the machine to standby.
About the “” symbol at the list
The “” at the list indicates that you can set the switch respectively for the second phone line. See “3.25
Multi Line Settings” on page 3-141 for the setting.
3-50
Memory Switch 000 — Dialer
Initial
Switch
Adjust
Setting
7
0
Factory use only
6
0
Factory use only
5
0
CED detection condition

4
0
Usage/Comments
Sets whether the detection should be strict or not.
Switch
3
0
2
1

1
1

0
0


DIS detect time after dialing
0: 55 sec
1: 70 sec
CED detection
0: No
1: Yes
Dial tone detection
0: Do not dial
1: Dial
Phone line type for the first
phone line
0: PSTN
1: PBX
5
4
Normal 
Strict
350ms 500ms 700ms 1000ms
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Sets the time DIS signal is detected after dialing a
number.
Can be use to ignore CED detection if noise on
the telephone line is mistaken as a 2100 Hz CED
signal.
Determines if the machine proceeds with dialing or
indicates an error if no dial tone is detected within
five seconds of going off-hook.
When set to PSTN, the machine checks for dial
tone and acts according to the setting of memory
switch 000, bit 1. When set to PBX, the machine
always dials a given number of seconds after going
off-hook. Memory switch 001 sets the number of
seconds.
3-51
Memory Switch 001 — Dialer
Switch

7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
DIS detection condition
Usage/Comments
Sets whether the detection should be strict or not.
Switch

3
2
1
0
1
0
0
1
PBX mode dial pause
5
4
Normal 
Strict
200ms 300ms 400ms 500ms
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Sets the number of seconds the machine waits
before dialing when memory switch 000, bit 0 is set
to PBX mode.
Switch 3 2 1 0
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
3-52
Pause time
0 sec
1 sec
2 sec
3 sec
4 sec
5 sec
6 sec
7 sec
8 sec
9 sec Initial setting
10 sec
11 sec
12 sec
13 sec
14 sec
15 sec
Memory Switch 002 — Dialer
Initial
Switch
Adjust
Setting
7
0
Factory use only
6
0
Factory use only
5
0
Factory use only
4
0
Factory use only
3
0
Factory use only
2
0
Factory use only
1
0
Factory use only
0
1
Redial when D.0.7 error
occurred
0 : Yes
1 : No
Usage/Comments
When this switch is set to “1”, the machine does not
auto-redial to the remote machine when the remote
unit did not answer the call within the incoming
detection time (D.0.7 error).
Memory Switch 003 — Factory use only
Memory Switch 004 — Dialer
Switch

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
DTMF attenuation
See table below
Note: The setting of this switch is available only
when setting other than 0.
Memory Switch 004…DTMF attenuation
Switch
3
2
1
0
-15
dB
1
1
1
1
-14
dB
1
1
1
0
-13
dB
1
1
0
1
-12
dB
1
1
0
0
-11
dB
1
0
1
1
-10
dB
1
0
1
0
-9
dB
1
0
0
1
3-53
-8
dB
1
0
0
0
-7
dB
0
1
1
1
-6
dB
0
1
1
0
-5
dB
0
1
0
1
-4
dB
0
1
0
0
-3
dB
0
0
1
1
-2
dB
0
0
1
0
-1
dB
0
0
0
1
-0
dB
0
0
0
0
Memory Switch 005 — Dialer

7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
1
1
0

3
0
Switch
Adjust
Factory use only
Ring signal detect time
Number of CI signal detection
in Fax/Tel Ready mode
0: Detect 1 time
1: Detect 2 times



2
0
1
0
0
1
Usage/Comments
Set the time that an incoming ring will not be detected
after hanging up. (Fax/Tel Ready mode only.)
Switch 6 5 4
0 0 0 100 ms
0 0 1 200 ms
0 1 0 300 ms
0 1 1 400 ms
1 0 0 500 ms
1 0 1 600 ms
1 1 0 700 ms
1 1 1 800 ms
Select the number of detection time of CI signal in
the Fax/Tel Ready mode or in the ringer silent mode.
Incoming calls are answered according to this setting
regardless of the number of rings chosen in the User
Settings.
Dual ring detection
0: No
1: Yes
Long ring detection
0: No
1: Yes
When enabled, the machine is able to auto answer
an incoming ring with an off time of 120 - 60 ms.
Frequency of the CI signal
detection
0: No
1: Yes
When disabled, the unit will not check the frequency of
the incoming CI signal.
Allows the machine to respond to an incoming ring
if the ring on time is longer than two seconds.
Memory Switch 006 ~ 009 — Factory use only
3-54
Memory Switch 010 — Transmission
7
Initial
Setting
1
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
2
1
0
1
1
0
1
Switch





Adjust
Usage/Comments
Busy tone detection
Set this switch to “0” if the ring tone of remote unit is
0: No
mistaken for a busy signal.
1: Yes
Fallback pattern (bps)
2400
4800
7200
9600
12000 14400
Set at 0: 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times
Set at 1: 4 times 1 times 1 times 1 times 1 times 1 times
Overseas mode
Re-enables echo suppression that is disabled by
0: No
the CED signal (2100 Hz). Also ignores the first DIS
1: Yes
signal and transmits the DCS signal in response to
the second DIS signal.
V.29 Echo Protect tone
International telephone lines equipped with echo
0: No
suppression will cut the beginning portion of the
1: Yes
transmitted information which may cause the
receiver not to receive the training and data. To
protect the received image from degrading, a 0.5
second Echo Protect tone is placed prior to the
training using G3 high-speed modem training
(V.29).
Maximum transmit speed (kbps)
2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6
0 0 0 0 0 0
0
0
1
1 1
1
1
1
0 0 0 0 1 1
1
1
0
0 0
0
1
1
0 0 1 1 0 0
1
1
0
0 1
1
0
0
0 1 0 1 0 1
0
1
0
1 0
1
0
1
3-55
Memory Switch 011 — Transmission
Switch
7
Initial
Setting
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
The time between reception of CFR and transmission of data
When CFR and data overlap due to line echo, increase the interval between CFR
and data transmission using this switch.

6
1
5
0
250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms
Switch 7 0
0
1
1
Switch 6 0
1
0
1
Interval between DCS and TCF
When FTT is received after DCS and TCF signals due to line echo, increase the
interval between DCS and TCF signals using this switch.
4
0
Switch 5
Switch 4

3
2
1
0
1
0
0
1
75 ms 300 ms 450 ms 600 ms
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Output attenuation
See table below
Memory Switch 011…Output attenuation
Switch
3
2
1
0
-15
dB
1
1
1
1
-14
dB
1
1
1
0
-13
dB
1
1
0
1
-12
dB
1
1
0
0
-11
dB
1
0
1
1
-10
dB
1
0
1
0
-9
dB
1
0
0
1
3-56
-8
dB
1
0
0
0
-7
dB
0
1
1
1
-6
dB
0
1
1
0
-5
dB
0
1
0
1
-4
dB
0
1
0
0
-3
dB
0
0
1
1
-2
dB
0
0
1
0
-1
dB
0
0
0
1
-0
dB
0
0
0
0
Memory Switch 012 — Transmission
7
6
5
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
4
1
Switch



3
0

2
0
1
0
0
0

Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Changing the date format of
the transmitted TTI
0: No
1: Yes
TTI transmit
0: No
1: Yes
Usage/Comments
When set to “1”, the machine changes the date
format of the transmitted TTI from MM:DD:YY, or
vice versa.
When set at “0”, transmission of the TTI is disabled.
The TTI includes the followings:
• Sender name
• Sender’s fax number
• Data & time, and number of pages
To set the individually transmission of them, see
Memory SW 016.
The time limit to receive the response signal for the
ECM post message.
(Note: Turning TTI
transmission off may violate
local or federal regulations.)
ECM response time
0: 3 sec
1: 4.8 sec
ECM error retransmit time
The time limit before the ECM error is retransmitted.
0: 200 ms
1: 400 ms
Interval between DIS and DCS
Switch 1
Switch 0
0 ms 500 ms 1000 ms 1500 ms
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Memory Switch 013 — Transmission
7
Initial
Setting
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
1
0
1
0
0
Switch





Adjust
ANSam detection
0: Yes
1: No
V.34 transmission
0: Yes
1: No
CSI/TSI/CIG transmit
0: Yes
1: No
ECM mode
0: On
1: Off
Retransmit automatically
when receiving RTN/PIN
signals
0: Yes
1: No
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Usage/Comments
During the V8 handshake, if some noise disturbs
the handshake and an error occurs, set to “1”.
Individual setting for V.34 transmission.
When set at “1”, transmission of the CSI, TSI and
CIG signals are disabled.
Determines ECM mode. ECM mode reduces
document memory and may lengthen transmission
and reception times.
When set to “1”, retransmission disables
automatically if receiving RTN/PIN signals.
3-57
Memory Switch 014 — Factory use only
Memory Switch 015 — Transmission
7
Initial
Setting
0
6
5
4
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Sending RTC signal when
transmission is canceled
0: Yes
1: No
1
1
0
1
Cancel redial if T.4.1 or T.4.4
error occurs
0: Yes
1: No
Action after EOR signal
0: Continue
1: Discontinue
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Program individual autodialer
attributes
0: No
1: Yes
Allows individual setting of memory switches 010 as
attribute 1, 011 as attribute 2, 012 as attribute 3 and
013 as attribute 4 when fax or e-mail destinatilns
are registered in the address book. (Refer to page
3-73 for settings.)
RTC signal is sent at the end of the transmission.
When set at “0”, the machine will send the RTC if
the transmission is canceled. No error will occur.
When set at “1”, an error will occur because
RTC will not be sent at the end of a canceled
transmission.
When set at “0”, if a T.4.1 or T.4.4 error occurs, the
machine will not retry the transmission.
Sets action after receiving PPR four times at 2400
bps.
Memory Switch 016 — Transmission
7
6
5
4
3
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
1
2
1
Subscriber ID transmit
0: No
1: Yes
1
1
TTI (name) transmit
0: No
1: Yes
0
0
Factory use only
Switch
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Additional data on TTI
transmit
0: No
1: Yes
Usage/Comments
When set at “0”, the transmission of the additional
data (time, the number of pages, file number, etc)
is disabled.
Note: This switch is available only when Memory
switch 012, bit 4 and/or Memory switch 013, bit 5 is
available.
When set at “0”, the transmission of the subscriber
ID is disabled.
Note: This switch is available only when Memory
switch 012, bit 4 and/or Memory switch 013, bit 5 is
available.
When set at “0”, the transmission of the name that
is stored in the unit is disabled.
Note: This switch is available only when Memory
switch 012, bit 4 and/or Memory switch 013, bit 5 is
available.
Memory Switch 017 ~ 019 — Factory use only
3-58
Memory Switch 020 — Reception
7
Initial
Setting
0
6
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
Switch


Adjust
Usage/Comments
Data error rate
0: 10%
1: 20%
Pause one second after
sending CED
0: No (75 ms)
1: Yes (1 sec)
Determines the allowable number of erred lines out
of total lines received in a document.
A 2100 Hz CED signal disables echo suppression
in some telephone equipment. When set to “1”, the
machine pauses one second after sending CED,
which allows echo suppression to restart. This may
help with problematic overseas reception.
Factory use only
Factory use only
Receive speed (kbps)
Maximum receive speed may be slowed to compensate for poor phone lines.
2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6
0 0 0 0 0 0
0
0
1
1 1
1
1
1
0 0 0 0 1 1
1
1
0
0 0
0
1
1
0 0 1 1 0 0
1
1
0
0 1
1
0
0
0 1 0 1 0 1
0
1
0
1 0
1
0
1
Memory Switch 021 — Reception
7
6
Initial
Setting
0
0
5
0
4
0
3
1

2
0

1
0
0
1
Switch

Adjust
Usage/Comments
Not used
DIS inch declaration
0 : Yes
1 : No
Paper size limitation
0: No limit
1: 3m
T1 timer
0: 35 sec
1: 20 sec
Print image data when post
message is not received after
receiving RTC signal
0: No
1: Yes
DIS/DTC Extend field
Transmit
0: Yes
1: No(Tx until Bit No.24 of
DIS/DTC)
G3 echo receive
This will limit the paper length of the received
document. Setting this bit to “1”, the paper will be
cut when the length reached to 3m.
Adjusts the T1 time-out. After the machine dials
the remote machine’s phone number, it begins
sending CNG and waits this amount of time before
disconnecting the line.
If the received document includes the RTC, the
machine prints the data even though the following
protocol is not succeeded.
Setting this switch to “1” will disable ITU-T superfine
mode.
Adjusts the delay between detection of training/TCF and sending of CFR.
Switch 1
Switch 0
100 ms 500 ms 800 ms 1200 ms
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Memory Switch 022 — Factory use only
3-59
Memory Switch 023 — Reception
7
6
Initial
Setting
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Switch

Adjust
Factory use only
V.34 reception
0: Yes
1: No
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Number of seconds for
pseudo-ringing
Usage/Comments
Individual setting for V.34 reception.
Sets the time for bell ringing after the machine has
answered the call in fax/tel reception mode.
Switch 2 1 0
111
300 seconds
110
180 seconds
101
120 seconds
100
90 seconds
011
60 seconds
010
50 seconds
001
40 seconds
000
30 seconds Initial setting
Memory Switch 024 ~ 029 — Factory use only
Memory Switch 030 — Modem
Switch


7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
0
Adjust
Number of HDLC end flags
Usage/Comments
Defines the number of HDLC end flags.
Switch 7 6 5 4
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
3
2
1
0
0
0
Factory use only
Factory use only
Digital cable equalizer
0: Free
1: Hold
0
0
No use
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Initial setting
When set to “1”, become efficient for the line short
break, but become weak for the line noise. It’
s available only for communication at 14,400 or
12,000 bit/s.
3-60
Memory Switch 031 — Modem

7
6
Initial
Setting
1
0

5
4
1
0
EYE-Q check level at
9600 bps

3
2
1
0
EYE-Q check level at
12000 bps

1
0
1
0
EYE-Q check level at
14400 bps
Switch
Adjust
EYE-Q check level at
7200 bps
Usage/Comments
0
0
1
1
Strict-- - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient
0
1
0
1
Memory Switch 032 — Modem

7
Initial
Setting
0

6
1
5
4
3
2
0
0
1
0
Factory use only
Factory use only
EYE-Q check level at
2400 bps
1
0
1
0
EYE-Q check level at
4800 bps
Switch


Adjust
EYE-Q slice level
0: Disable
1: Enable
Check EYE-Q
0: No
1: Yes
Usage/Comments
Setting this bit to “1” enables memory switch 032,
bits 0-3 and memory switch 031, bits 0-7 and
enables EYE-Q check adjustment.
Set at 0: Line condition status (EYE-Q) is not
checked after checking TCF.
Set at 1: Line condition status (EYE-Q) is checked
after checking TCF.
0
0
1
1
Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient
0
1
0
1
3-61
Memory Switch 033 — Modem
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Switch


Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Delete receive echo of CFR
at the receiver side
0: No
1: Yes
Expand FSK receive time
after detecting flag
0: 3.3 seconds
1: 10 seconds
Usage/Comments
Modem will be opened only in high-speed mode.
Sets this switch to “1” to resolve the problem caused
of the echo of CFR.
Setting this switch to “1” extend HDLC frame receive
timer in FSK from 3.3 seconds to 10 seconds after
detecting pre-amble.
Memory Switch 034 ~ 039 — Factory use only
3-62
Memory Switch 040 — Scanner
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Document TX length limit
0: 3.6 meters
1: 1 meter
Setting to unlimited will override document jam
sensing.
Memory Switch 041 ~ 059 — Factory use only
Memory Switch 060 — Remote reception
7
6
Initial
Setting
0
1
5
0
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Factory use only
CML relay off time after
dialing
0: 1 sec
1: 200 ms
DTMF tones heard through
handset
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Usage/Comments
When dialing from the keypad, phone line noise
may occur as the CML relay switches on and off.
Set this switch to “0” to avoid this.
Determines if DTMF tones are produced through
the handset in off-hook dialing.
3-63
Memory Switch 061 — Remote reception
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Off-hook / on-hook detect
time
Usage/Comments
Sets the time interval between the on-hook and offhook (or off-hook/on-hook) condition.
Switch 3 2 1 0 Time
0000
0 ms
0001
100 ms
0010
200 ms
0011
300 ms
0100
400 ms Initial setting
0101
500 ms
0110
600 ms
0111
700 ms
1000
800 ms
1001
900 ms
1 0 1 0 1000 ms
1 0 1 1 1100 ms
1 1 0 0 1200 ms
1 1 0 1 1300 ms
1 1 1 0 1400 ms
1 1 1 1 1500 ms
3-64
Memory Switch 062 — Remote reception
7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
1
3
2
1
0
0
0
1
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
CNG detect in Ans/Fax ready
0: No
1: Yes
Switch-hook time
When set to “1”, the machine detects the CNG
signal in Ans/Fax ready.
If the switch hook is quickly depressed and
released, switch-to-fax will occur. This setting
adjusts how quickly the switch hook activation must
be.
Switch 3 2 1 0
Time
0000
0 ms
0001
100 ms
0010
200 ms
0011
300 ms Initial setting
0100
400 ms
0101
500 ms
0110
600 ms
0111
700 ms
1000
800 ms
1001
900 ms
1 0 1 0 1000 ms
1 0 1 1 1100 ms
1 1 0 0 1200 ms
1 1 0 1 1300 ms
1 1 1 0 1400 ms
1 1 1 1 1500 ms
3-65
Memory Switch 063 — Remote reception and TAD interface
7
Initial
Setting
0
6
1
5
0
4
1
3
0
2
1
1
1
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Adjust silent detection time
This switch adjusts the length of silence required
for silent detection activation.
Switch 7 6 5 4
Time
0000
0 sec
0001
1 sec
0010
2 sec
0011
3 sec
0100
4 sec
0101
5 sec Initial setting
0110
6 sec
0111
7 sec
1000
8 sec
1001
9 sec
1010
10 sec
1011
11 sec
1100
12 sec
1101
13 sec
1110
14 sec
1111
15 sec
Number of seconds silent
detection remains active
This switch adjusts the length of time silence
detection remains active.
Switch 3 2 1 0
Time
0000
0 sec
0001
10 sec
0010
20 sec
0011
30 sec
0100
40 sec
0101
50 sec
0110
60 sec Initial setting
0111
70 sec
1000
80 sec
1001
90 sec
1 0 1 0 100 sec
1 0 1 1 110 sec
1 1 0 0 120 sec
1 1 0 1 130 sec
1 1 1 0 140 sec
1 1 1 1 150 sec
3-66
Memory Switch 064 — Remote reception and TAD interface
7
Initial
Setting
0
6
0
5
1
4
1
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
1
Switch
Incoming rings
Adjust
Usage/Comments
CNG detect period after TAD
begins recording ICM
Sets the period during which CNG is detected after
the TAD begins recording incoming message.
Switch 7 6 5 4
Time
0000
0 sec
0001
10 sec
0010
20 sec
0011
30 sec Initial setting
0100
40 sec
0101
50 sec
0110
60 sec
0111
70 sec
1000
80 sec
1001
90 sec
1 0 1 0 100 sec
1 0 1 1 110 sec
1 1 0 0 120 sec
1 1 0 1 130 sec
1 1 1 0 140 sec
1 1 1 1 150 sec
CNG detect period after TAD
answers
Sets the period during which CNG is detected after
the TAD answers an incoming call.
Switch 3 2 1 0
Time
0000
0 sec
0001
10 sec Initial setting
0010
20 sec
0011
30 sec
0100
40 sec
0101
50 sec
0110
60 sec
0111
70 sec
1000
80 sec
1001
90 sec
1 0 1 0 100 sec
1 0 1 1 110 sec
1 1 0 0 120 sec
1 1 0 1 130 sec
1 1 1 0 140 sec
1 1 1 1 150 sec
TAD plays Outgoing message
TAD records Incoming message
CNG detection is active
CNG detection is active
(Adjusted by Memory switch 64, bit 0-3)
(Adjusted by Memory switch 64, bit 4-7)
Silent detection is active
(Adjusted by Memory switch 63, bit 0-3)
Silent detection time
(Adjusted by Memory switch 63, bit 4-7)
3-67
Memory Switch 065 — Remote reception
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Adjustment of CI detect time
Sets the time added to or reduced from the CI
detect time.
Factory use only
Factory use only
Beep if fax handset hang up
0: Yes
1: No
Switch 7 6 5 4 3
Time
11111
150 msec
11101
140 msec
:
:
01001
40 msec
00111
30 msec
00101
20 msec
00011
10 msec
00000
0 msec
00010
-10 msec
00100
-20 msec
00110
-30 msec
01000
-40 msec
:
:
11100
-140 msec
11110
-150 msec
Initial setting
Determines if your machine beeps when having left
the fax’s handset hanging up after communication.
Memory Switch 066 ~ 069 — Factory use only
3-68
Memory Switch 070 — Operation
7
Initial
Setting
0
6
0
5
4
0
0
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Display error line
0: No
1: Yes
Tonal line monitor
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Sort autodialer printout
0: Sort by autodialer location
1: Sort by location ID
Print check message if power
is lost
0: No
1: Yes
Print page if error occurs
during memory transmission
0: No
1: Yes
Print check message
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
The number of error lines contained in the received
data will be shown in the LCD.
Allows fax communication to be heard through the
monitor speaker.
Specifies how entries on autodialer printouts are
sorted.
In the event of two power losses in a 40-hour
period, documents will be lost. When power is
restored, a check message will print.
For easy identification, the first page of a document
stored for memory transmission will print along a
check message if an error occurs during memory
transmission.
To notify the user of an error, a check message can
be printed if a communication error occurs.
3-69
Memory Switch 071 — Operation
7
6
5
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
4
3
0
1
2
1
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only
Factory use only
Print TCR with the original
page during memory
transmission when the result
is NG
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Print TCR with the original
page during memory
transmission when the result
is OK
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
Display modem speed
0: No
1: Yes
For easy identification, the first page of a document
stored for memory transmission will print along a
TCR when the transmission result is NG.
For easy identification, the first page of a document
stored for memory transmission will print along a
TCR when the transmission result is OK.
The transmit/receive speed is displayed in the LCD.
Memory switch071 … Print TCR with the original page
Switch 3
Switch 5
When Memory transmission was OK, …
When Memory transmission was NG, …
When all broadcast transmissions were OK, …
When some broadcast transmissions were NG, …
0
0
No
No
No
No
1
1
No
Yes
No
Yes
0
Yes
No
Yes
No
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Memory Switch 072 — Operation
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Erase polled document
0: No
1: Yes
Print TCR after the batch
transmission
0: No
1: Yes
Usage/Comments
Determines if a document stored for polling is
erased after being polled.
Determines if printing the confirmation report after
completing the batch transmission.
Memory Switch 073 ~ 096 — Factory use only
3-70
Memory Switch 097 — Other functions
7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
1
3
0
2
1
0
0
1
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Day light saving time
(Summer time) start month
This switch sets the month when the day light saving time (summer time) begins.
Switch 7 6 5 4
Time
0000
March
0001
January
0010
February
0011
March
Initial setting
0100
April
0101
May
0110
June
0111
July
1000
August
1001
September
1010
October
1011
November
1011
December
This switch sets on which week when the day light
saving time (summer time) begins.
Day light saving time
(Summer time) start week
Start day light saving from Sunday 1:00
Switch 3 2 1 0
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
3-71
Time
of the last week
of the first week
of the second week (USA initial)
of the third week
of the fourth week
of the last week of the month
(European initial)
Memory Switch 098 — Other functions
7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
1
0
1
1
3
0
2
1
0
0
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Day light saving time
(Summer time) end month
This switch sets the month when the day light saving time (summer time) ends.
Switch 7 6 5 4
Time
0000
October
0001
January
0010
February
0011
March
0100
April
0101
May
0110
June
0111
July
1000
August
1001
September
1010
October
(European initial)
1011
November (USA initial)
1011
December
This switch sets the week when the day light saving
time (summer time) ends.
Day light saving time
(Summer time) end week
End day light saving from Sunday 1:00
Switch 3 2 1 0
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
Memory Switch 099 — Factory use only
3-72
Time
of the last week
of the first week (USA initial)
of the second week
of the third week
of the fourth week
of the last week (European Initial)
3.4 Setting Individual Autodialer Attributes
This function allows the user to configure an individual address book entry with the settings shown in
Memory Switches 010, 011, 012 and 013.
To set the individual attributes:
1. Change memory switch 15, bit 7 to “1”. (See setting 3.3.1 Setting the Memory Switches for more
information on changing memory switch 015.)
2. When the function is enabled, an “Attribute” option is added to the address book destination registration steps. As an address book destination is programmed, an extra step showing Attribute 1,
Attribute 2, Attribute 3, and Attribute 4 are added as the last step.
3. Set the individual bit positions as shown in the following table. To change a setting, press[ ]or[ ]until
the cursor is below the desired bit position; then press <1> or <0> to make the change.
4. Press <Enter> to save the setting of the displayed attribute and advance to the next attribute.
5. To set the other attribute, repeat steps 3-4.
6. When the last attribute is set, the fax will advance to the next autodialer programming steps.
3-73
Attribute 1 - Individual Autodialer Setting (Equivalent to Memory Switch 010)
7
Initial
Setting
1
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
1
2
1
1
0
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Busy tone detection
Sets this switch to “0” if the ring tone of remote unit
0: No
is mistaken for a busy signal.
1: Yes
Fallback pattern (bps)
2400
4800
7200
9600 14400
Set at 0: 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times
Set at 1: 4 times 1 times 1 times 1 times 1 times
Overseas mode
Re-enables echo suppression that is disabled by
0: No
the CED signal (2100 Hz). Also ignores the first DIS
1: Yes
signal and transmits the DCS signal in response to
the second DIS signal.
V.29 Echo Protect tone
International telephone lines equipped with echo
0: No
suppression will cut the beginning portion of the
1: Yes
transmitted information which may cause the
receiver not to receive the training and data. To
protect the received image from degrading, a 0.5
second Echo Protect tone is placed prior to the
training using G3 high-speed modem training
(V.29).
Maximum transmit speed (kbps)
2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6
0 0 0 0 0 0
0
0
1
1 1
1
1
1
0 0 0 0 1 1
1
1
0
0 0
0
1
1
0 0 1 1 0 0
1
1
0
0 1
1
0
0
0 1 0 1 0 1
0
1
0
1 0
1
0
1
3-74
Attribute 2 - Individual Autodialer Setting (Equivalent to Memory Switch 011)
Switch
7
Initial
Setting
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
The time between reception of CFR and transmission of data
When CFR and data overlap due to line echo, increase the interval between CFR
and data transmission using this switch.
6
1
5
0
250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms
Switch 7 0
0
1
1
Switch 6 0
1
0
1
Interval between DCS and TCF
When FTT is received after DCS and TCF signals due to line echo, increase the
interval between DCS and TCF signals using this switch.
4
0
Switch 5
Switch 4
3
2
1
0
*
*
*
*
75 ms 300 ms 450 ms 600 ms
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Output attenuation
See table below.
Output attenuation when individual autodialer attributes are set.
Switch
3
2
1
0
-15
dB
1
1
1
1
-14
dB
1
1
1
0
-13
dB
1
1
0
1
-12
dB
1
1
0
0
-11
dB
1
0
1
1
-10
dB
1
0
1
0
-9
dB
1
0
0
1
3-75
-8
dB
1
0
0
0
-7
dB
0
1
1
1
-6
dB
0
1
1
0
-5
dB
0
1
0
1
-4
dB
0
1
0
0
-3
dB
0
0
1
1
-2
dB
0
0
1
0
-1
dB
0
0
0
1
-0
dB
0
0
0
0
Attribute 3 - Individual Autodialer Setting (Equivalent to Memory Switch 012)
7
6
5
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
4
1
Switch
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Changing the date format of
the transmitted TTI
0: No
1: Yes
TTI transmit
0: No
1: Yes
Usage/Comments
When set to “1”, the machine changes the date
format of the transmitted TTI from MM: DD: YY, or
vice versa.
When set at “0”, transmission of the TTI is disabled.
The TTI includes the followings:
• Sender name
• Sender’s fax number
• Data & time, and number of pages
To set the individually transmission of them, see
Memory SW 016.
The time limit to receive the response signal for the
ECM post message.
(Note: Turning TTI
transmission off may violate
local or federal regulations.)
ECM response time
0: 3 sec
1: 4.8 sec
ECM error retransmit time
The time limit before the ECM error is retransmitted.
0: 200 ms
1: 400 ms
Interval between DIS and DCS
Switch 1
Switch 0
0 ms 500 ms 1000 ms 1500 ms
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
3-76
Attribute 4 - Individual Autodialer Setting (Equivalent to Memory Switch 013)
7
Initial
Setting
0
6
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
ANSam detection
0: Yes
1: No
During the V8 handshake, if some noise disturbs
the handshake and an error occurs, set to “1”.
0
V.34 transmission
0: Yes
1: No
Individual setting for V.34 transmission.
5
4
0
0
3
0
2
1
0
1
0
0
Factory use only
ECM mode
0: On
1: Off
Retransmit automatically
when receiving RTN/PIN
signals
0: Yes
1: No
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Determines ECM mode. ECM mode reduces
document memory and may lengthen transmission
and reception times.
When set to “1”, retransmission disables
automatically if receiving RTN/PIN signals.
3-77
3.5 All RAM Clear
The All RAM Clear setting will erase all user-programmed information, all documents in memory, and
reset the memory switches and unique switches to factory defaults.
This feature may also be used to try and clear a machine malfunction or lock up. If possible, when the
All RAM Clear is used to reset a malfunction or lock up, it is advisable to print the machine settings,
one-touch and speed dial listings to help in reprogramming this information.
Note: The All RAM Clear does not clear the machine parameters, life monitor and consumable order
sheet. If you need to clear them, see “Clearing the machine parameters” on page 3-4, “Clear
Life Monitor”on page 3-132 or “Clear consumable order sheet” on page 3-131.
1. To perform an All RAM Clear, from standby, press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <3>.
2. Press [Yes].
Note: To finish the operation without performing RAM clear, press [No].
3.6 Clear Programmed Data / User Settings
User programmed information such as address book entries, date, time, Transmit Terminal Identifier
(TTI), Subscriber ID, etc., are stored in the unit’s Random Access Memory (RAM). A battery back up
holds this information, when the power is lost.
This function does not clear the machine parameters, memory switches and unique switches.
Therefore, this setting is useful to reset the user-programmed information but leave specific
parameters and switches configured for a particular telephone system, etc.
To reset only each switch, see page 3-4, 3-50 and 3-80.
Note: If desired, the All RAM Clear setting can be used to erase all users programmed information, all
documents in memory, and reset the memory switches and unique switches to factory defaults.
For information on the All RAM Clear setting, see the next page.
1. To clear programmed data and user settings, from standby, press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <2>.
2. Press [Enter].
Note: To finish the operation without performing initialization, press [Cancel].
3-78
3.7 Unique Switch Adjustment
3.7.1 Setting the Unique Switches
These switches are used to program internal machine parameters. The primary back up battery
maintains these settings if power is lost.
1. From standby, press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <4>.
2. Press [Switch Edit].
3. Call up the desired switch by pressing [q] or [p] , or by pressing the numeric keypad.
4. Select the desired switch by pressing the box.
5. To navigate through the unique switch settings:
•The bits are ranged from 7 (left) to 0 (right).
•Press [ ]or[ ] of the cursor key to move the cursor.
•Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad, or [q] or [p] , to change the bit value.
• Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed unique switch and return to the unique
switch edit screen.
•Press [Back] not to save the setting of the displayed unique switch.
6. If you want to set other unique switches, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7.
7. Press [Reset] to return the machine to standby.
3-79
3.7.2 Clearing the Unique Switches
Resets the unique switches to factory defaults.
1. From standby, press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <4>.
2. Press [Switch Clear].
3. Press [Yes]. The unique switches will reset to factory defaults.
Note: To finish the operation without clearing the switches, press [No].
4. Press [Reset] to return the machine to standby.
About the “” symbol at the list
The “” at the list indicates that you can set the switch respectively for the second phone line. See “3.25
Multi Line Settings” on page 3-141 for the setting.
3-80
Unique Switch 000 — Dialer
7
6
Initial
Setting
0
1
5
0
4
1
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
Switch

Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only
Congestion tone detection
0: No
1: Yes
Ring back tone wait time
(seconds)
3.0 3.3 3.6 3.9
Switch 5: 0
0
1
1
Switch 4: 0
1
0
1
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Setting this switch to “0” ignores telephone line
congestion tones.
Sets the time until the ring back tone begins after
answering an incoming call in the Fax/Tel Ready or
Tel/Fax Ready mode.
Unique Switch 001 — Dialer
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Enable the dial prefix key
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Unique Switch 002 ~ 009 — Factory use only
3-81
Unique Switch 010 — Transmission
7
6
5
4
3
Initial
Setting
1
0
1
0
1
2
1
0
1
0
1
Switch

Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Including TTI inside the
document
0: No
1: Yes
Usage/Comments
Setting this bit to “0” transmit the document length
added with the TTI. Setting it to “1” transmit the
length including TTI inside the document. However
in this case, the image at the top of the document
might be overlapped with TTI.
(TTI length: 4.2mm)
Factory use only
The number of times PPR is detected during ECM transmission
1 time 2 times 3 times 4 times
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Unique Switch 011 ~ 014 — Factory use only
3-82
Unique Switch 015 — Transmission
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only
Factory use only
Not used
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
V.8 handshake in manual Tx
0: No
1: Yes
Determine I the handshaking will be done with V.8
recommendation if manual transmission.
Unique Switch 016 — Transmission
Switch
7
Initial
Setting
1
6
1
5
0
4
1
3
0
2
1
0
0
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Available *, # and space
upon F-code box registration
0: No
1: Yes
Available *, # and space
upon F-code communicating
0: No
1: Yes
Ignore space in F-code ID
0: Yes
1: No
F-code sub-frame off
0: Send
1: Not send
Send F-code box’s TTI
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Retrieve document
0: No
1: Yes
Ignore F-code bit
0: No
1: Yes
Determines if the * (asterisk), # (sharp) and space
are available upon F-code box registration.
Determines if the * (asterisk), # (sharp) and space
are available upon F-code communicating.
Determines if checking the space stored in the
F-code ID.
Do not send the sub-address and password of
F-code box when a point of sending DCS signal
after EOM signal.
Transmit the sub-address and box name of F-code
box with F-code polling document.
Retrieve the document received in F-code
SecureMail box by polling transmission.
Neglect SEP bit of DTC signal or SUB bit of DCS
signal at F-code polled transmission.
Note: The “F-code communication” is possible the SecureMail and Polling operation using the F-code
(SUB/SEP/PWD/SID). However, it is not based on T.33 recommendation.
3-83
Unique Switch 017 — Transmission
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Switch

Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
JBIG transmission
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Determines if the JBIG transmission is available.
Unique Switch 018 — Transmission
7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
0
3
0
2
1
0
0
1
0
Switch



Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Disconnect the line when
the transmission speed falls
down under 7200 bps
0: No
1: Yes
Disconnect the line when
the transmission speed falls
down under 4800 bps
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
Transmission when disable to
detect first NSF in real time
transmission.
0:Retry to detect NSF
1:Transmit with the standard
protocol
Determine if the machine disconnect the phone line
when the transmission speed fall down under 7200
bps.
Determine if the machine disconnect the phone line
when the transmission speed fall down under 4800
bps.
Determines the action when disable to detect first
NSF in real time transmission.
Unique Switch 019 — Factory use only
3-84
Unique Switch 020 — Reception
7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
1
3
1
2
0
1
1
0
1
Switch

Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only
Factory use only
No use
Transmit CED signal
0: No
1: Yes
Pseudo-ring start time
(seconds)
5 6 8 10
Switch 3: 0 0 1
1
Switch 2: 0 1 0
1
Printout the pages completed
to receive during receiving
into memory
0: No
1: Yes
Avoid time out in ECM
reception
0: No
1: Yes
Determines if sending CED signal.
Sets the time the pseudo-ring begins after
answering an incoming call.
(Fax/Tel Ready or Tel/Fax Ready mode only.)
Determines if whether to printout the page which
data is completed to receive during receiving it into
fax’s memory.
Disables 60 seconds RNR time out in ECM mode.
Unique Switch 021 — Reception
7
6
5
4
3
Initial
Setting
0
1
1
0
1
2
0
1
1
0
0
Switch

Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
TCF check time
(in 100 ms units)
Usage/Comments
If the TCF time is such that poor image quality is the
result, lengthen the TCF check time.
Switch 3 2 1 0
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
3-85
Time
0 ms
100 ms
200 ms
300 ms
400 ms
500 ms
600 ms
700 ms
800 ms
900 ms
1000 ms  Initial setting
1100 ms
1200 ms
1300 ms
1400 ms
1500 ms
Unique Switch 022 — Reception
7
6
5
4
3
Initial
Setting
0
1
1
0
1
2
0
1
0
0
0
Switch

Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
JBIG reception
0: No
1: Yes
Receive the junk fax
0: Yes
1: No
Usage/Comments
Determines how documents from the remote fax are
received.
When the block junk fax feature is set to Mode 2
and the fax does not receive the TSI signal from the
remote fax, determine if receiving the fax other than
the remote fax number set to the block junk dial list.
Factory use only
Factory use only
Unique Switch 023 — Reception
7
6
5
4
3
2
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
Switch

Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Receiving fax in 600 dpi
(S-fine)
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
Usage/Comments
Sets whether to receive fax in 600 dpi.
Unique Switch 024 ~ 028 — Factory use only
Unique Switch 029 — Reception
7
6
Initial
Setting
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
1
0
Factory use only
Displays the message “No
Network Connection.”
0 : Yes
1 : No
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
0
0
Factory use only
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Set this switch to “1” will delete the message
“No Network Connection.” Use this switch if the
machine is not used in a network.
3-86
Unique Switch 030 — Modem
7
6
5
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
4
1

3
1

2
1

1
0
0
1
Switch


Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only
Factory use only
3429 baud symbol rate when
communicating at V.34
0: No
1: Yes
3200 baud symbol rate when
communicating at V.34
0: No
1: Yes
3000 baud symbol rate when
communicating at V.34
0: No
1: Yes
2800 baud symbol rate when
communicating at V.34
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
2400 baud symbol rate when
communicating at V.34
0: No
1: Yes
If the error frame often occurs because of the
symbol rate is too high, setting this switch to
“1” mask that symbol rate and keep down the
occurrence of error frame.
See above (switch 5 to 2).
Unique Switch 031 — Modem
Switch

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Forced 2400 symbol rate
when probing SNR is adverse
SNR means that Signal Noise Ratio.
If the SNR is less than the threshold you set,
the modem overrides the bandwidth evaluation
algorithm and forces the symbol rate to2400 baud.
3-87
Unique Switch 032 — Modem
7
6
5
4
3
2
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
Switch

Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
ANSam output time
0: 3 sec
1: 4 sec
Factory use only
Factory use only
The time limit to output the ANSam (A sinewave
signal at 2100 Hz amplitude-modulated). Sets to “1”
when the V.8 handshake is hard to achieve.
Unique Switch 033 — Factory use only
Unique Switch 034 — Modem
7
Initial
Setting
0
6
5
4
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
Switch

Adjust
Usage/Comments
Symbol rate adjustment
When re-transmission occurs frequently, set to “0”.
0: Yes
When set to 1, the re-transmission may become
1: No
not to be occurred.
Symbol rate adjustment. Adjust the symbol rate selected by the link.
Switch 6 5 4 FLAT 2Link 3Link 4Link 5Link 6Link 7Link
0 0 0 : 3429 3429 3200 3000 3000 3000 2800
0 0 1 : 3429 3200 3200 3000 3000 3000 2800
0 1 0 : 3429 3200 3000 3000 3000 3000 2800
0 1 1 : 3200 3200 3000 3000 3000 3000 2800
1 0 0 : 3200 3200 3000 3000 3000 3000 2800
No use
No use
No use
No use
Unique Switch 035 ~ 036 — Factory use only
3-88
Unique Switch 037 — Modem
7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
3
0
Switch

Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
The delay before postmessage is transmitted
Usage/Comments
If retraining occurs due to the low reception signal
level and few delay of the telephone line, it may
overlap the second post-message. In this case,
increase the delay before the post-message is
transmitted.
Switch 4:
Switch 3:
2
1
0
0
0
1
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Unique Switch 038 ~ 039 — Factory use only
3-89
0 ms
0
0
100 ms
0
1
200 ms
1
0
300 ms
1
1
Unique Switch 040 — Factory use only
Unique Switch 041 — Scanner
7
Initial
Setting
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Set the fixed ratio for copy
and the auto ratio in detail
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Usage/Comments
When set to “1”, the ratio will be calculated in detail
automatically according to the document size and
the recording paper size.
Unique Switch 042 ~ 043 — Factory use only
Unique Switch 044 — Scanner
7
6
5
4
3
2
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Set background level when
the machine turned on
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
Usage/Comments
When set to “1”, the machine will set its background
level at power-on.
Unique Switch 045 ~ 047 — Factory use only
3-90
Unique Switch 048 — Scanner
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only
Factory use only
Leading edge document
margin adjustment upon
scanning using FBS.
Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0
000000
000001
000010
000011
000100
000101
000110
000111
001000
001001
001010
001011
001100
001101
001110
001111
010000
010001
010010
010011
010100
010101
010110
010111
011000
011001
:
111111
Adjusts the leading edge
margin when scanning
document by FBS.
Each setting changes by
1 mm.
3-91
Settings
0 mm
1 mm
2 mm
3 mm
4 mm
5 mm
6 mm
7 mm
8 mm
9 mm
10 mm
11 mm
12 mm
13 mm
14 mm
15 mm
16 mm
17 mm
18 mm
19 mm
20 mm
21 mm
22 mm
23 mm
24 mm
25 mm
63 mm
Unique Switch 049 — Scanner
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only
Factory use only
Trailing edge document
margin adjustment upon
scanning using FBS
Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0
000000
000001
000010
000011
000100
000101
000110
000111
001000
001001
001010
001011
001100
001101
001110
001111
010000
010001
010010
010011
010100
010101
010110
010111
011000
011001
:
111111
Adjusts the trailing edge
margin when scanning
document by FBS.
Each setting changes by
1 mm.
3-92
Settings
0 mm
1 mm
2 mm
3 mm
4 mm
5 mm
6 mm
7 mm
8 mm
9 mm
10 mm
11 mm
12 mm
13 mm
14 mm
15 mm
16 mm
17 mm
18 mm
19 mm
20 mm
21 mm
22 mm
23 mm
24 mm
25 mm
63 mm
Unique Switch 050 — Printer
7
6
5
4
3
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
1
0
2
1
1
0
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Smoothing in H-Fine (400 x
400 dpi) mode
0: No
1: Yes
Smoothing in S-Fine (200 x
400 dpi) mode
0: No
1: Yes
Smoothing in Fine mode
0: No
1: Yes
Smoothing in Normal mode
0: No
1: Yes
Smoothes the data scanned in each resolution
mode.
Unique Switch 051 — Factory use only
Unique Switch 052 — Printer
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Printing margin adjustment
0: Normal
1: No margin
3-93
Unique Switch 053 — Printer
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
Adjust
Printer density adjustment.
Usage/Comments
Switch
76543210
Settings
00000000
00000001
00000010
00000011
00000100
00000101
00000110
00001001
00001011
:
Not available
Lightest
:
:
Unique Switch 054 ~ 059 — Factory use only
3-94
Normal  Initial setting
:
Darkest
Not available
↓
Unique Switch 060 — Remote reception
7
6
5
4
3
2
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
Switch
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Use numeric keypad on the
fax using second phone
0: No
1: Yes
Manual transmit/receive
using Start key after off-hook
of second phone
0: No
1: Yes
Silent detection
0: No
1: Yes
Determines if using the numeric keypad on the
control panel of the fax using the second phone.
Determines if transmitting or receiving manually
using Start key after off-hook of the second phone.
Note:To enable this function Unique Switch 060: 2
must also set to “1”
Enables or disables silent detection during Ans/Fax
Ready mode.
Unique Switch 061 ~ 063 — Factory use only
Unique Switch 064 — Remote reception
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Load 24V to TEL 2 line
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
Set the relay of TEL 2 in
Silent receiving
0: On
1: Off
Usage/Comments
When set to “1”, 24 V will be loaded to TEL 2 in
communication.
Note:Set to “1” in 064 bit 0 when make this feature
available.
When set to “1”, TEL 2 does not ring in the silent
receiving.
Unique Switch 065 ~ 066 — Factory use only
3-95
Unique Switch 067 — Remote reception and TAD interface
7
6
Initial
Setting
0
1
5
4
0
0
3
0
Switch
2
0
1
1
0
1
Adjust
Factory use only
Detect busy tone during
pseudo-ring ringing
0: No
1: Yes
No use
CNG detection during OGM
output in ANS Ready
0: Yes
1: No
Number of detection DTMF
Usage/Comments
Sets the number of detection the DTMF during
Ans/Fax Ready mode.
Switch 3 2 1 0
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
:
1111
Unique Switch 068 and 069 — Factory use only
3-96
Number of detection
Not detect
1
2
3 Initial setting
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
15
Unique Switch 070 — Operation
7
6
Initial
Setting
0
1
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only
LCD error message
0: Remains in LCD
1: Returns to standby
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
After an error message has printed, the setting of
this switch determines if the error message will
remain in the display.
Unique Switch 071 — Operation
7
Initial
Setting
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Line monitor in Quick memory
transmission
0: Off
1: On
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Rx document to polling
document
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Retrieve the document received in the memory by
polling transmission.
3-97
Unique Switch 072 — Operation
7
6
5
4
3
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
0
1
2
0
1
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Effect charge setting in
department mode
0: No
1: Yes
Send service report
1: No
2: Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
When this bit is set to “1”, the following available:
 Input the price rate per page for transmission
 Print transmission charge on the department list
Unique Switch 073 — Factory use only
Unique Switch 074 — Operation
7
6
5
4
3
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
2
1
Switch
1
0
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Prohibit double registration
0: No
1: Yes
Priority of consumable order
sheet printing
0: Print after the current
printing job is completed
1: Print immediately
Print the transmission time
on TCR
0: Print the transmit time
1: Blank
When receive a fax message
during Auto power off mode,
the LCD will be in standby
mode
0: No
1: Yes
When set to “0”, the same phone number can be
registered in the address book.
When the drum cartridge has reached its design life,
or the toner cartridge is empty, the machine prints a
consumable order sheet.
When this switch is set at “0”, the machine will
not print consumable order sheet until the current
printing job is finished.
When set to “0”, the transmission time will be
printed on TCR.
Unique Switch 075 — Factory use only
3-98
Unique Switch 076 — Operation
7
Initial
Setting
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Journal report sorting order
0 : From the latest
1 : From the oldest
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Unique Switch 077 — Factory use only
Unique Switch 078 — Operation
7
Initial
Setting
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Default letter of QWERTY
keypad
0 : Upper case
1 : Lower case
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Unique Switch 079 — Factory use only
3-99
Unique Switch 080 and 081 — Factory use only
Unique Switch 082 — Miscellaneous
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
The time until the backlight is
set to OFF
Each setting changes by
10 minutes.
If the keys are not used for the set time, the panel
backlight will be turned off.
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Settings
00000001
10 minutes (initial)
00000010
20 minutes
00000011
30 minutes
:
00000110
60 minutes
:
00001010
100 minutes
:
:
11111110
250 minutes
11111111
255 minutes
Unique Switch 083 ~ 084 — Factory use only
3-100
Unique Switch 085 — Miscellaneous
7
6
Initial
Setting
0
0
5
0
4
3
0
0
2
1
1
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only
Print/Send the consumable
order sheet when the drum is
near end
0: Yes
1: No
Print/Send the consumable
order sheet when toner is
near empty
0: Yes
1: No
Factory use only
“Next doc” default setting
when scanning with ADF
0: No
1: Yes
“Next doc” default setting
when scanning with FBS
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Multi T.30 monitor journal
0: No
1: Yes
Note: For this feature to work correctly, you must
register several items. See “3.16 Consumable
order sheet” page 3-126.
Note: For this feature to work correctly, you must
register several items. See “3.16 Consumable
order sheet” page 3-126.
Determine the default setting for “Next doc”
scanning with ADF.
If it is set to “0” the default setting for Next doc is
“No”, if is “1” the setting is “Yes”.
Determine the default setting for “Next doc”
scanning with FBS.
If it is set to “0” the default setting for Next doc is
“No”, if is “1” the setting is “Yes”.
If this setting is “Yes”, the journal report will be
printed not in the sequence number but in the table
number to see the T.30 monitor.
Unique Switch 086 — Factory use only
Unique Switch 087 — Miscellaneous
7
6
5
4
3
2
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Print the sending document
on the error massage sheet
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
3-101
Unique Switch 088 ~ 095 — Factory use only
Unique Switch 096 — Miscellaneous
7
Initial
Setting
0
6
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Update the Flash ROM via
USB cable
0: Unable
1: Able
Multi line setting
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Usage/Comments
Pressing <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <8> enables the
same operation. When updating the ROM via USB
cable setting this bit to “0”, set it back to “0” after
update.
This switch enables it to set the first and second
line differently.
Unique Switch 097 ~ 099 — Factory use only
3-102
3.8 T.30 Monitor
In all binary coded facsimile control procedures the HDLC frame structure is utilized. The basic HDLC
structure is shown below.
Preamble
Binary coded infromation
Non-stabdard facilities frame(NSF) Called subscriber identification frame (CSI) Digital identification frame (DIS)
Flag
Flag
Address
Control
Facsimili
contorl
field
Facsimili
information
field
Frame
checing
sequence (FCS)
The information in this
protion is printed in the T.30
monitor.
The control signal is identified by FCF (Facsimile Control Field). Additional 8-bit octet information
follows FIF (Facsimile Information Field) and FC (Facsimile Control Field) to further clarify facsimile
procedures. This is added to DIS, DCS, DTC, CIS, CIG, TSI, NSC, NSF, and NSS signals.
3.8.1 Print T.30 Monitor
This mode causes the unit to print a G3 procedural summary of the last fax communication.
1. From standby, press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <5>.
2. Press [Yes] to print the T.30 Monitor list.
3.8.2 Multi T.30 Monitor
The communications on the journal list are able to print.
1. Set the unique switch for Multi T.30 monitor to "1 (On)". (Unique switch 85 switch 0 )
2. Print the journal list and check the communication number of which to print the T.30 Monitor.
3. From standby, press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <5>.
4. Enter the communication number and press [Enter].
5. Press [Yes] to print the T.30 Monitor list.
3-103
3.8.3 How to see the print out
(Example for fax transmission)
3-104
(Example for fax receipt ion)
TxFrame : Signals sent by machine printing T.30 report
RxFrame : Signals received from remote machine
DATA:Additional 8-bit octet information to clarify facsimile procedures. In the list, the data are
in hexadecimal digits. At the top of each data shows the type of the signal.
TCF :TCF check sequence
PIX :Image data
[V17 MMR A3 0 F E]
Error Correction Mode (E=ECM on, page=EMC off)
Mode (U=Ultra fine: 600 x 600 dpi, H= Hyper fine: 400 x 400 dpi,
F=Fine, N=Normal)
Receiver's minimum scan line time capability
Recording width document size
Compressing method
Data signalling rate
3-105
NSF, NSC, NSS:
NSF, NSC, NSS are nonstandard unit frames. The first three bytes of the FIF are specified by T.30.
The subsequent digits are individually determined by the manufacturers. The first byte refers to the
country code. The second byte is a spare; it is 00 (hex) presently. The third byte is the manufacturer
code.
TxFrame
RxFrame
NSF
DATA
20 00 00 45 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
The third byte is the manufactures code
The second byte is spare; currently set at 00H
The first byte indicates the country code
Indicates the NSF code
CSI, CIG, TSI:
CSI, CIG, TSI is composed of a maximum 20-digit number comprising the country code, area code,
and subscriber’s telephone number. In the printed results, printing starts from the least significant digit
of the telephone number. The following code table lists the codes used to make the 20-digit number
and their value. Below the code table is a CSI example.
Code
20
30
31
Value
Space
0
1
Code
32
33
34
Value
2
3
4
Code
35
36
37
Value
5
6
7
Code
38
39
2B
Value
8
9
+
An example telephone number of 123-456-7890 is represented as:
TxFrame
CIS
RxFrame
DATA
30 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 20 20 20 20 20 20
0
9
8
7
6
5
20 20 20 20 20
4
3
2
1
DIS, DTC, DCS:
DIS, DTC, DCS frames define the standard CCITT capabilities of the two units such as transmit and
receive speeds, coding methods, printer speed, etc.
TxFrame
DIS
RxFrame
DATA
00 EF F9 C4 80 81 80 00
The bits are in the following order:
( 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1) (16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9) (24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17)
(32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25) (40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33) (48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41)
(56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49) (64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57)
Table for hexadecimal digit to binary number:
Hex
Binary
Hex
Binary
0
0000
4
0100
1
0001
5
0101
2
0010
6
0110
3
0011
7
0111
Hex
8
9
A
B
Binary
1000
1001
1010
1011
So in the above list the first "EF" is "11101111"(bit order 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1)
3-106
Hex
C
D
E
F
Binary
1100
1101
1110
1111
A transmission with PPR signal:
The error frame in fax reception is identified using the post-message signal and PPR signal.
TxFrame RxFrame
PPS MPS
PPR
DATA
BF 4F 00 00 0F
BC F0 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
In PPS signal FIF, the pages, blocks and frames are displayed one value less than the real value.
So in the above case:
Pages: 00 means one page
Blocks: 00 means one block
Frames: 0F means 16 frames
In PPR signal FIF, the error frame will be displayed with "1". In the above case the fist frame is "F0"
and it means there was an error from frame 4 to 7.
3-107
3.9 Printer maintenance mode
In case of followings, use this mode.
• When you have replaced the Fuser unit and/or Transfer roller.
• When “Call Service : XX” message appear in the LCD, access this mode to determine the cause of
the “Call Service : XX” error message.
• To send the service error via e-mail, register the location using this mode.

When you replace the Fuser unit or Transfer roller, you must set the count of replacement
manually
To access the printer maintenance mode:
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <6>.
2. Press [Set Replace Counter].
3. The LCD shows:
4. If you have replaced the transfer roller skip to step7.
5. If you’ve replaced the fuser, select [Replace Fuser].
The LCD shows:
6. Press [Yes]. The machine goes back to standby mode.
3-108
7. If you’ve replaced the transfer roller, select [Replace Fuser].
The LCD shows:
8. Press [Yes]. The machine goes back to standby mode.

When “Call Service : XX” message is displayed on the LCD
To access the printer maintenance modes for determine the cause of the “Call Service : XX” error
message.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <6>.
2. Press [Service Call].
3. The kind of printer error will be displayed. If happens two or more troubles, the number of troubles
is displayed on the right upper of the LCD. For example, when “Heater error” and “Drum Fuse
Error” has occurred, the LCD shows 2.
2
Number of troubles
4. Press [Enter] to show the other printer error.
5. Press <Reset> to exit this mode.
Note:See “4.11.1 Call Service : XX” page 4-17 to 4-19 for the printer error messages and an explanation of each are outlined.

Register the e-mail location
To send the service error via e-mail, register the location using this mode.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <6>.
2. Press [Service Call E-mail].
3. Select [Send Call E-Mail].
3-109
4. Select “ON” and press [Enter].
5. Select [Mail Address 1].
6. To send the service report to the Muratec customer service, press [Enter].
You may also edit the location and press [Enter].
7. To send the service report to another location, press [Mail Address 2]. Otherwise, skip to step 11.
8. Enter the e-mail address of the location using the numeric keypad.
9. Press [Enter] to save the setting.
10. To enter one more location, press [Mail Address 3], and repeat steps 8 and 9.
11. Press <Reset> to go back to the stand by mode.
3.10 Monitor speaker
If you need to monitor the signal of fax communication, turn this mode to on. You can hear the signal
sound with machine’s speaker during fax transaction.
1.From standby mode, press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <8>.
2.Press [On], and [Enter] to turn the mode on.
Note: To turn this mode off, perform step 1 and 2 by selecting [Off].
3-110
3.11 Test Modes
This mode offers the ability to print a test pattern and monitor certain unit output functions. Included
are followings.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9> to enter the test mode.
2. Select the desired test mode.
3.11.1 Life Monitor
The life monitor displays the current software version, the total number of pages scanned, printed, and
transmitted, the number of drums replaced and the total page count on the current drum.
Note: The All RAM Clear setting does not clear the life monitor. To clear, see below.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Life Monitor].
• ROM Ver.0 = displays the version of the machine ROM on the main control board
• 01 to 02 = displays software version of the optional kits
• NGP2 = displays version of network ROM on the NGP board
• NGPBT = displays version of network boot ROM on the NGP board
• NGPNL = displays version of the panel ROM
2. Press [Detail] to see the options.
• Scan Pages = displays total pages scanned
• Print Pages = displays total pages printed
• Tx Pages = displays total pages transmitted
• Drum Rplcd = displays drum replaced times
• Drum Life = displays total pages printed on current drum
3-111
• Toner Rplcd = displays toner replaced count
• Toner Life = displays toner life
• Fuser Rplcd = displays fuser replaced count
• Fuser Life = displays fuser life
• Xsfer Rplcd = displays transfer roller replaced count
• Xsfer Life = displays transfer roller life
3. Press [Enter] to exit the display life monitor
3.11.2 Printer Test
The Printer Test mode offers seven different test patterns as shown below.
Checkered
Squares
Paper Scum
Halftone
Halftone2
White
D: Halftone
E: Halftone2
F: White
Ladder
LED Head
Black
G: Black
H Pattern
Note: DO NOT print the H Pattern, when there is a document in memory. Printing H Pattern with
documents in memory may delete them all.
3-112
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Test Pattern Print].
2. Select the desired pattern is displayed.
3. Select the paper size to test.
4. Press [Enter].
5. Press [Yes].
The selected pattern will be printed continuously.
Note: Press <Stop> to stop printing.
6. To select another pattern, repeat the steps 1 to 4.
3-113
3.11.3 Feeder test
The feeder test discharges all documents in the automatic document feeder at a constant speed and
displays the document total in the LCD.
1. Load test documents into the automatic document feeder (ADF).
2. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Feeder Test].
3. Press [Start] to start the feeder test.
The page number in the center of the LCD displays how many pages the ADF has fed.
4. Press <Stop> to exit the test mode.
3.11.4 Port Status
This test mode is not applicable to field service of this machine.
3.11.5 Set Background Level
The background level is an established threshold used to help measure the reflective ability of a
scanned document. This threshold can change if the scanner lamp, CCD, or the ballast is replaced;
therefore this mode should be used to reset the threshold when these items are changed.
The Set Background Level mode allows the level to be set without erasing memory contents.
Note: The background seal at the inside of the scanner cover should be cleaned prior to setting the
background level to ensure an accurate reading.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Background level].
2. Press [Start] to start the background level setting.
After the background level setting, the machine goes back to the standby mode.
3-114
3.12 Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switch and
Unique Switch Settings
This function instructs the unit to print a list of the machine parameter, memory switch and unique
switch settings. The list shows the default and current settings for each. After printing, the unit returns
to standby.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <0>.
2. Press [Yes] to start printing.
3.13 Factory Functions
This factory functions provide several machine testes including LED and LCD tests, a keypad test,
memory tests, a RTC test and other test functions.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>.
3.13.1 Function List
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>. Then select [Factory Function List].
2. Prss [Yes].
A list of the Factory Functions will be printed. After printing the unit will return to standby.
3-115
3.13.2 LED Test
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [LED Test].
Pressing <Setting>, all LEDs will turn on.
Pressing <Setting> twice, all LEDs will turn off.
2. Press <Reset> to exit the test mode.
3.13.3 LCD Test
This mode displays two test patterns in LCD.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [LCD Test].
Pressing <Setting>, all dots turn on.
Next pressing <Setting>, all dots turn off.
2. Press <Reset> to exit the test mode.
3-116
3.13.4 Key Panel Test
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [Key Test].
2. As each button on the keypad is pressed, a representative name as show in the following table will
be displayed.
Key
PRINTER
COPY
FAX
Indication in LCD
Printer
Copy
Fax
SCAN
Panel Key
SETTING
Scan
Panel Key1 to 4
Setting
Key
RESET
ENERGY SAVE
Numeric keys 0
through #
START
STOP
FAX CANCEL / JOB
CONFIRM.
Indication in LCD
Reset
Energy Save
Tenkey 1 to #$
Start
Stop
Fax Cancel
3. Press <Stop> twice to cancel the key panel test.
Note:
and
symbols are for factory use (for factory inspection).
3.13.5 SRAM Check
This mode is used to test the SRAM memory where user programmed parameters such as date, time,
TTI, etc are stored.
Note: When this test is executed, the unit will perform an All RAM Clear.
The All RAM Clear erases all user settings and resets all memory switches, machine parameters and
unique switches to factory defaults.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [SRAM Check].
2. Enter the HEX code (00 ~ FF) using numeric keypad, then press <Start>. The HEX code is written
to, then read from memory. After that, the result (OK/NG) will be shown in the display. Then the machine will return to factory function. Use the sharp key (#) to enter A, B, C, D, E and F. See table
below.
A
B
C
D
E
F
#, 0 #, 1 #, 2 #, 3 #, 4 #, 5
The data are written to, then read from each address. The results are shown in the display. If the
read/write test is successful, the display will show “OK”.
3-117
If some portion of the read/write test fails, the display will show “NG” with the address and the data
name.
3. Upon completion, the machine returns to the test mode.
3.13.6 DRAM Check
This mode is used to test the DRAM memory, or document memory.
Note: When this test is performed, an All DRAM Clear will be performed by the unit. The All RAM
clear erases all user settings and resets all memory switches, machine parameters and unique
switches to factory defaults.
This is a read/write test that requires a few moments to complete.
Note: Perform a DRAM test whenever a memory upgrade is added to the unit.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [DRAM Check].
2. Enter the HEX code (00 ~ FF) using numeric keypad and one-touch key [01] to [06], then press
<Start>.
3. Depending on the amount of DRAM in the unit, press <0>, <1>, <2>, or <3> on the numeric keypad.
Please refer to the following table:
Note: Usually, press <0>.
Press
Check area
0
All DRAMs
1
The standard memory on the main control board
2
The first half of the 32MB Optional Memory PCB
3
The second half of the 32MB Optional Memory PCB
4. Press <Start>.
The machine starts checking and the result (OK/NG) will be shown in the display.
For example, if the check area is “0” and one additional memory, you will see:
3-118
5. Press <Reset> to exit the test mode.
3.13.7 RTC(real time clock) Test
This test mode is not applicable to field service of this machine.
3.13.8 Page memory check
When the letters are not printed correctly, perform this test.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [Page Memory check].
2. Select the desired checking area.
3. The machine starts checking and the result (OK/NG) will be shown in the display.
If NG is shown, perform the DRAM clear (page 3-118), and then go back to step 1.
4. Press <Setting> to exit the test mode.
3-119
3.13.9 Touch panel adjustment
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [Adjust Touch Panel].
2. Touch the lower left corner of the panel, and press <Start>.
3. Touch the upper right corner of the panel, and press <Start>.
4. Press <Reset> to exit the test mode.
3.13.10 Generate bell test
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [Generate Bell Test].
2. The bell stars ringing.
3. Press <Stop> to stop.
3-120
3.14 Line Tests
This mode offers several internal tests and ability to monitor certain unit output functions. Included are
relay tests, modem signal output monitoring, and DTMF output monitoring.
3.14.1 Relay Test
This mode tests the on/off operation of various relays and switches.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <2>.
2. Select the line you want to test. If the optional second phone line is not attached, you can only test
line1.
3. Select [Relay].
4. Select the relay you want to test. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.
CML relay – on
DP relay – on
L relay – on
RI relay – on
CML relay – off
DP relay – off
L relay –off
RI relay – off
S relay – on
H relay – on/
CONT24V relay – on
Hook key
S relay – off
H relay –off
CONT24V relay – off
5. Press [Enter] to exit the relay test mode.
3-121
3.14.2 Tonal Signal Test
The tonal signal test permits the unit’s output tones to be monitored.
Note: To monitor the tones, an external monitoring device must be connected to the telephone line
jack.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <2>.
2. Select the line you want to test. If the optional second phone line is not attached, you can only test
line1.
3. Select [Tonal].
4. Select your desired tonal signal test. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.
Refer to the table below.
Note: It may take several moments for output signal to change.
Signal
None (stop signal)
400 Hz tone
600 Hz tone
1100 Hz tone
1300 Hz tone
2100 Hz tone
3000 Hz tone
3400 Hz tone
FSK WHITE
FSK BLACK
FSK _W1_B1
V27_1200_2400 picture date
V27_1600_4800 picture date
V29_2400_7200 picture date
V29_2400_9600 picture date
V17_2400_7200_W1_B0 picture date
V17_2400_7200_W1_B1 picture date
Signal
V17_2400_7200_W1_B4 picture date
V17_2400_7200_W0_B1 picture date
V17_2400_7200_W4_B1 picture date
V17_2400_9600_W1_B0 picture date
V17_2400_9600_W1_B1 picture date
V17_2400_9600_W1_B4 picture date
V17_2400_9600_W0_B1 picture date
V17_2400_9600_W4_B1 picture date
V17_2400_12000_W1_B0 picture date
V17_2400_12000_W1_B1 picture date
V17_2400_12000_W1_B4 picture date
V17_2400_12000_W0_B1 picture date
V17_2400_12000_W4_B1 picture date
V17_2400_14400_W1_B0 picture date
V17_2400_14400_W1_B1 picture date
V17_2400_14400_W1_B4 picture date
V17_2400_14400_W0_B1 picture date
V17_2400_14400_W4_B1 picture date
3-122
Signal
V34_2400_2400 ~ 21600
V34_2800_4800 ~ 26400
V34_3000_4800 ~ 28800
V34_3200_4800 ~ 31200
V34_34290_4800 ~ 33600
VOICE
MELODY
GRBT
5. Press [Enter] to exit the relay test mode.
3.14.3 DTMF Output Test
The DTMF output test permits the unit’s DTMF tones to be monitored.
Note: To monitor the tones, an external monitoring device must be connected to the telephone line
jack.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <2>.
2. Select the line you want to test. If the optional second phone line is not attached, you can only test
line1.
3. Select [DTMF].
4. Select your desired tonal DTMF tone. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.
Refer to the table on the next page.
Note: It may take several moments for output signal to change.
3-123
Display
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*
#
Signal
DTMF0 (941 Hz + 1336 Hz)
DTMF1 (697 Hz + 1209 Hz)
DTMF2 (697 Hz + 1336 Hz)
DTMF3 (697 Hz + 1477 Hz)
DTMF4 (770 Hz + 1209 Hz)
DTMF5 (770 Hz + 1336 Hz)
DTMF6 (770 Hz + 1477 Hz)
DTMF7 (852 Hz + 1209 Hz)
DTMF8 (852 Hz + 1336 Hz)
DTMF9 (852 Hz + 1477 Hz)
DTMF6* (941 Hz + 1209 Hz)
DTMF# (941 Hz + 1477 Hz)
Display
ROW1
ROW2
ROW3
ROW4
COL1
COL2
COL3
COL4
5. To stop outputting the DTMF tone, press [Stop].
6. To select another DTMF tone, repeat steps 3-4.
Otherwise, proceed to step 6.
7. To exit the DTMF output test, press <Setting> under not tests.
8. Press [Enter] to exit the relay test mode.
3-124
Signal
ROW1 (697 Hz)
ROW2 (770 Hz)
ROW3 (852 Hz)
ROW4 (941 Hz)
COL1 (1209 Hz)
COL2 (1336 Hz)
COL3 (1447 Hz)
COL4 (1633 Hz)
3.15 Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode
Important: The fax machine is shipped with mirror carriage locking plate for protecting the machine’
s mirror carriage during shipping. When installing the fax, slide the scanner locking knob
back to its unlocking position. Then turn the power on and perform the following:
1. Press <Setting>,< *>, <1>, <4>.
2. Select [OFF].
Important: If reshipping, turn on this mode to move the mirror carriage to the transport position. Then
move the mirror carriage locking knob to “LOCK”.
3-125
3.16 Consumable order sheet
When the drum cartridge is near end of its design life or the toner cartridge is near empty, the machine
prints (or transmit) the consumable sheet.
Ĭ
ĭ
į
Į
İ
ı
IJ
ij
Ĵ
ĵ
Ķ
ķ
ĸ
Ĺ
ĺ
Ļ
ļ
Ľ
ľ
1
2
3
Ŀ
21
22
23
24
13
14
15
Dealer’s name
Dealer’s code
Dealer’s telephone number
16
17
18
19
20
21
Dealer’s fax number
Dealer’s e-mail address
Comments
Drum rotate time (x 10 seconds)
Drum life time
Drum used percentage
10
11
Dealer’s fax number
Customer’s name
Place of the customer write his/her
signature
Block letter of customer’s signature
Customer’s address
Customer’s account
Serial number of the unit
Customer’s telephone number
Customer’s fax number registered by Initial
setting mode (Setting, User Install).
Order item
Description of the order item
22
23
12
Quantity of the order item
24
Total print pages
Number of print pages after toner cartridge
or drum unit was replaced
ROM version
4
5
6
7
8
9
3-126
3.16.1 Set consumable order sheet
1. Clear the junk data, if necessary (see “Clear consumable order sheet,” page 3-131).
2. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <5>.
3. Select [Order Sheet].
4. Press [Dealer Code]. Enter the Dealer’s code. The code may be up to 10 characters in length.
5. Press [Enter] to save the dealer’s code.
6. Press [Dealer Name]. Enter the Dealer’s name (Supplier’s name). The name may be up to 30 characters in length.
7. Select [Enter] to save the dealer’s name.
3-127
8. Select [Dealer Tel No].
Enter the distributor’s telephone number. The phone number may be up to 20 characters in length.
To enter the numbers, use the numeric keypad.
9. Press [Enter] to save the dealer’s telephone number.
10. Select [Dealer Fax No].
Enter the dealer’s fax number. The fax number may be up to 20 characters in length.
11. Press [Enter] to save the dealer’s fax number.
12. Select [Dealer E-Mail].
Enter the dealer’s e-mail address. The address may be up to 50 characters in length.
13. Press [Enter] to save the dealer’s address.
14. Select [Cust Account #].
Enter the customer’s account number. The customer’s account number may be up to 10 characters in length.
3-128
15. Press [Enter] to save the customer’s code.
16. Select [ ] or [ ] to go to the next menu items.
17. Select [Cust Name].
Enter the customer’s account number. The customer’s account number may be up to 30 characters in length.
18. Press [Enter] to save the customer’s name.
19. Select [Address 1].
Enter the customer’s address for the upper row. The customer’s address may be up to 30 characters in length.
20. Press [Enter] to save the customer’s address for the upper row.
21. Select [Address2].
Enter the customer’s address for the lower row. The customer’s address may be up to 30 characters in length.
22. Press [Enter] to save the customer’s address for the lower row.
3-129
23. Select [Cust Tel].
Enter the customer’s phone number. The phone number may be up to 20 characters in length.
24. Press [Enter] to save the customer’s phone number.
25. Select [Unit Serial #].
Enter the scanner’s serial number. The number may be up to 18 characters in length.
26. Press [Enter] to save the scanner’s serial number.
27. Select [Order Sheet Setting].
Determine if the machine prints, transmit or e-mail the consumable order sheet when the printer
consumable is near end of its designed life.
If [OFF] is selected, the machine does not print or transmit the consumable order sheet even
though the printer consumable is near end of its designed life.
28. Press [Enter] to save the setting.
3-130
3.16.2 Clear consumable order sheet
The consumable order sheet keeps several items, these are not clear the all RAM clear function
(<Setting>, <*>, <0>, <3>). To clear the information of consumable order sheet:
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <5>.
2.Select [Clear Order Sheet].
3. To clear the information of consumable order sheet, press [Yes].
To finish the operation without clearing, press [No].
3.16.3 Print consumable order sheet
To check the customer’s information has been registered correctly, print the consumable order sheet.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <5>.
2.Select [Order Sheet List].
3.17 DRAM Clear
Note: Perform a DRAM clear whenever a memory upgrade is installed to the unit or the DRAM is
replaced.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <6>.
2. Press [Yes]. The DRAM will be cleared.
Note: To finish the operation without performing initialization, press [No].
3. After clearing, turn the power OFF and ON.
3-131
3.18 Clear Life Monitor
The life monitor keeps a count of the pages scanned, printed, and transmitted, along with the drum
replacement count and total pages printed on the current drum. This mode clears these counters.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <7>.
2. Press [Yes]. The counters will be reset.
Note: To finish the operation without performing initialization, press [No].
3.19 Clear Optional Data
This mode clears all data and all activity journals for Printer controller and second phone line.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <8>.
2. Press [Yes]. The optional data will be reset.
Note: To finish the operation without performing initialization, press [No].
3-132
3.20 Set Service Code
This is the code to protect the life monitor clear operation. If it is not necessary to protect to the life
monitor clear operation, abort this operation without entering the service code.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <9>.
2. Your next mode depends on whether you’re creating or modifying the service code:
•If creating --- Use the numeric keypad to enter 0000 and press [Enter].
• If modifying --- Use the numeric keypad to enter the proper service code and press [Enter]. If
you enter an invalid code, the fax will reject the attempt and abort this operation.
3. Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit service code.
4. Press [Enter].
Note: To turn off the service code and return to normal life monitor clear (not protected), change the
code to 0000 by repeating steps 1-4 and entering 0000 in step 3.
3-133
3.21 Life monitor maintenance
When you replace the main control PCB, you should register the previous several counter values of
the life monitor.
1. Before updating the software or replacing the main control PCB, write down the counter values of
the life monitor.
2. To confirm the life monitor, press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, [Enter]. Then press [Life Monitor] and
[Detail]. (See “3.11.1 Life Monitor,” page 3-111.)
3. After you write down the counter values of the life monitor, update the software or replace the main
control PCB.
4. Then, press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <0>.
5. Enter previous values of the printed pages, then press [Enter].
6. Enter previous value of the drum replaced count, then press [Enter].
7. Enter previous value of the drum life, then press [Enter].
3-134
8. Enter previous value of the toner replaced count, then press [Enter].
9. Enter previous value of the toner life, then press [Enter].
10. Enter previous value of the fuser replaced count, then press [Enter].
11 Enter previous value of the fuser life, then press [Enter].
3-135
12. Enter previous value of the transfer roller replaced count, then press [Enter].
13 Enter previous value of the transfer roller life, then press [Enter].
14. Press [Enter] to return to the standby mode.
3-136
3.22 Sensor input test
This mode can confirm the sensor status. When the sensor operates, the value next to sensor name
changes 0 to 1. For example, when open the 1st paper cassette, the CAS1:OFF change to CAS1:ON.
1.Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <2>.
Sensor
Status
name
CAS1 OPEN1 OFF:1st cassette is close
ON:1st cassette is open
JAM1 JAMC1 OFF: 1st side cover is close
ON: 1st side cover is open
PES1 PES
OFF: Detect paper in 1st cassette
ON: No paper in 1st cassette
CAS2 OPEN2 OFF:2nd cassette is close
ON:2nd cassette is open
JAM2 JAMC2 OFF: 2nd side cover is close
ON: 2nd side cover is open
PES2 PES2 OFF: Detect paper in 2nd cassette
ON: No paper in 2nd cassette
HPES TRAYS OFF: Detect paper in bypass tray
ON: No paper in bypass tray
C2U
----OFF: No 2nd cassette
ON: 2nd cassette is attached
CVSW ----OFF: Front cover is close
ON: Front cover is open
PSS
PSS
OFF: No paper
ON: Detect paper
PDS
PDS
OFF: No paper
ON: Detect paper jam
SWB DPS
Not working
Code
Code
Name
DREX ----DRNW ----DVNW ----DS1
DS1
DS2
DS2
HS
TXIL
Home
Sensor
TXIL
APS
-----
TEMP ----BAT
-----
THR
-----
TS1
TS2
---------
Status
OFF: No drum
ON: Detect drum
OFF: Drum used
ON: Drum new
OFF: Developing unit used
ON: Developing unit new
OFF: No document
ON: Document existing
OFF: No document
ON: Document existing
OFF: Mirror outer than HS
ON: Mirror inner than HS
OFF: Scanner cover is closed
ON: Scanner cover is open
OFF: Platen cover is open
ON: Platen cover is closed
Show the internal temperature
of machine.
Show the voltage of the SDRAM
backup battery.
Show the temperature of Heater
roller.
Show the remaining toner level.
Show the remaining toner level.
2.Press [Enter] to return to standby mode.
Note: CAS2, JAM2 and PES2 do not change, when there is no second cassette attached.
3-137
3.23 Printer diagnostic mode
This mode can confirm the operation of each parts of the printer section.
1.Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <3>.
2.Select the device you want to set to ON.
Fan Full
:Turn the fan motor with full power
Rx Motor :Turn the Rx motor
Dup Motor :Turn the Duplex motor
Clutch 1
:Turn the clutch of 1st cassette
Clutch 2
:Turn the clutch of 2nd cassette
Reg Clutch:Turn the Regist clutch
ALL OFF :Turn the all device to off
3. Press <Reset> to exit.
3-138
3.24 Network service mode
This mode provides the following four items:
•
Display the sum-check of network ROM and network boot ROM
•
Export the network setting
•
Import the network setting
•
All clear the registered parameters of the network board
3.24.1 Display the server sum-check
1.Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <4>.
2.Select [Show Server Sumcheck].
3. Press <Reset> to return to standby mode.
3.24.2 Export / Import the network setting
The network setting will be exported or imported using this mode.
When the NGP board or the compact flash memory card on the NGP board need to be replaced, use
the “Export Server Data” mode to backup the setting on a compact flash memory card. After the NGP
board or the card has been replaced, use “Import Server Data” mode to restore them on the new
device.
Note: The exported data will be saved as a file named “backupRAM.dat”. If there is already a file with
the same name, the file will be overwritten.
Note: The “Import Server Data” will take effect when it is imported and the machine is rebooted. Be
sure to reboot the machine soon after the data is imported. Or all the registered data on the
machine will be overwritten and go back to the point when the backup data was create, when
the machine is rebooted on other occasion.
1.Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <4>.
2.Select [Export Server Data].
3. Press [Yes].
3-139
4. The “ServerData.dat” will be created on the compact flash memory card.
5. When replacing the NGP PCB, attach the card to the new NGP PCB.
When replacing the card, use a card reader/writer and copy the data on the new card.
6. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <4>.
7.Select [Import Server Data].
8. Press [Yes].
9. The data will be imported on the machine.
10. Reboot the machine to be the settings in effect.
3.24.3 All clear the registered parameters of the network board
You can clear all the data of network settings like IP address, Subnet Mask or Default Gateway.
1.Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <4>.
2.Select [Clear Server Data].
3. Press [Yes]. The information will be cleared.
Note: To finish the operation without performing initialization, press [No].
3-140
3.25 Multi Line Settings
This setting makes it possible to set the following menu for the optional second line:
•
Memory Switches
•
Unique Switches
•
ECM mode
•
Dialing Pause
•
Number of Rings
Note: To set the second line, it is necessary that the Unique Switch 096 bit 6 is set to “On (1)” in
advance.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <8>.
2. Select [Memory switch].
See “3.3 Memory Switch Adjustment” from page 3-49 if necessary. You will see a “” mark on the
list for switches available to set respectively for the second phone line.
3. Press [Enter] to save the setting.
4. Select [Uniq Switch].
See “3.7 Unique Switch Adjustment” from page 3-79, if necessary. You will see a “” mark on the
list for switches available to set respectively for the second phone line.
5. Press [Enter] to save the setting.
3-141
6. Select [EMC Mode].
7. Select the ECM mode for the second line.
8. Press [Enter] to save the setting.
9. Select [Dialing Pause].
10. Enter the dialing pause for the second phone line using the cursor key or the numeric keypad.
11. Press [Enter] to save the setting.
12. Select [Number of Rings].
13. Enter the number of rings for the second phone line using the cursor key or the numeric keypad.
14. Press [Enter] to save the setting.
15. Press <Reset> to go back to the stand by mode.
3-142
3.26 Flash Rom Sum Check
This mode allows you to check Sum after the Flash ROM version is updated.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <9>.
2. Press [Enter] to return to standby mode.
3.27 Printer registration adjustment
This mode can adjust the print registration for each paper source.
For more detail, see “5.3 Adjustment” in section5.
3-143
3.28 Service Report
3.28.1 Set the service report
If using this feature, you should be enter following items:
• Send– Select whether to send the service report via fax or via e-mail.
• Report – Where to send the service report. On “Fax Number 1” and “Mail Address 1” are the
muratec customer service locations entered as default.
• Report format – Select between simple report or detailed report. (See page 3-148 for details
of each format)
• Period – The report can be send either once in a determined month(s) or once in a month on
a determined date and time.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <2>.
2. Press [Setting].
3. Select [Send Service Report].
4. To activate the Service Report mode, select [Fax] or [e-mail].
5. Press [Enter].
If you have selected [Fax], proceed to step 6.
If you have selected [e-mail], skip to step 15.
3-144
6. Enter the detail for sending the report via fax. Press [Fax Number 1].
7. Press [On].
8. Press [Enter].
9. To send the service report to the Muratec customer service, press [Enter].
You may also edit the location and press [Enter].
10. To send the service report to another location, press [Fax Number 2]. Otherwise, skip to step 21.
11. Press [On].
12. Press [Enter].
13. Enter the fax number of the location using the numeric keypad.
14. Press [Enter] to save the setting. Now, skip to step 21.
15. Enter the detail for sending the report via e-mail. Press [Mail Address 1].
3-145
16. To send the service report to the Muratec customer service, press [Enter].
You may also edit the location and press [Enter].
17. To send the service report to another location, press [Mail Address 2]. Otherwise, skip to step 21.
18. Enter the e-mail address of the location using the numeric keypad.
19. Press [Enter] to save the setting.
20. To enter one more location, press [Mail Address 3], and repeat steps 18 and 19.
21. Go to the next display and press [Report Format].
22. Select the report format between [One Page] and a [Detail].
23. Press [Enter] to save the setting.
24. Select [Period].
25. Select between [Interval] and [Monthly] and press [Enter].
To send the report at some definite interval, select [Interval].
To send the report on a designated time once a month, select [Monthly].
• When you select [Interval], proceed to step 26-1.
• When you select [Monthly], proceed to step 26-2.
3-146
26-1. You can set the interval for service report auto transmission from 1 to 12 months.
The default setting is 3 months. Enter the desired number (01 to 12) using the cursor key or the
numeric keypad, and press [Enter].
26-2. Enter the day and time in 24-hour format when to send the report, and press [Enter].
For instance, to send the report every 5th day of the month at 2 pm, press, 0, 5, 0, 2, 0, 0.
27. Press <Reset> to go back to the stand by mode.
3.28.2 Clear service report
To clear the information of service report:
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <2>.
2.Press [Delete].
3. To clear the information of service report setting, press [Yes].
To finish the operation without clearing, press [No].
3-147
3.28.3 Print out the service report
If set, the print out of the report is available:
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <2>.
2.Press [Service Report].
3. Press [Yes].
According to the setting, either the simple report or the full report will be printed.
The contents of the service report
Header:
Line
1
Item
Name
2
Date
Serial No
Cut Tel
3
Installation Date
Days Used / Work Days
4 and 5
ROM Version
6
Memory
Detail
The registered TTI or the “Customer’s name” registered
at Consumable Order Sheet
Current date
The serial number registered at Consumable Order
Sheet
The telephone number registered at Consumable Order
Sheet
The date the machine was installed (The date set at User
install)
Days since the machine is installed / Days the machine
has worked
The ROM version of Main ROM, PCL ROM, NGP board
ROM and NGP panel ROM
The memory amount
The header is common for simple report and detailed report.
3-148
Simple report
Note: Some device may not be available on this machine.
Paper Cassette Status:
Paper Supply Device: The device names that supply paper.
Items
Detail
Present setting
Whether the device is available or not, if available the supplied paper size or
“Paper out” is printed.
Print Pages (Every I/C)
The printed pages per device. The value in the parenthesis shows the pages printed with the current drum. (I/C = Imaging Cartridge)
JAM Pages (Every I/C)
The jammed pages per device. The value in the parenthesis shows the
pages printed with the current drum. (I/C = Imaging Cartridge)
Media
The media supplied to the device.
Printer Jam Info: The information of pages printed normally and jammed per paper supply devices.
Scan Pages / Rate:
Items
Copy
Fax
Scanner
Sub Total
Total
PageCount
Detail
The numbers or documents copied and copied times, per ADF, FBS or
RADF.
The numbers or documents transmitted and transmitted times, per ADF,
FBS or RADF.
The numbers or documents scanned in scanner mode and scanned times,
per ADF, FBS or RADF.
The total of copy, fax and scan function.
The total of all scanned documents.
The total pages counted according to the counter setting. (If the documents
are legal-sized, the machine will count 5 pages for every 4 sheets.)
3-149
# of Scanner Jam: The total number of document jam in each location
Communication Info:
Items
Scanner Tx Times
Memory Tx Rate
Tx Times
Rx Times
Tx Pages
Rx Pages
Detail
The number of times for memory transmission.
The number of times for memory transmission.
The total time of transmission per G3, ECM and Super G3.
The total time of reception per G3, ECM and Super G3.
The total pages of transmission per G3, ECM and Super G3.
The total pages of reception per G3, ECM and Super G3.
3-150
First page of the detailed report
Note: Some device may not be available on this machine.
Paper Cassette Status:
Paper Supply Device: The device names that supply paper.
Paper Release Device: The device names that stack paper.
Items
Detail
Present setting
Whether the device is available or not, if available the supplied paper size or
“Paper out” is printed.
Print Pages (Every I/C)
The printed pages per device. The value in the parenthesis shows the pages printed with the current drum. (I/C = Imaging Cartridge)
JAM Pages (Every I/C)
The jammed pages per device. The value in the parenthesis shows the
pages printed with the current drum. (I/C = Imaging Cartridge)
Media
The media supplied to the device.
Printer Jam Info: The information of pages printed normally and jammed per paper supply devices.
Life Counter:
Items
Detail
# of pages printed after replacing toner The number of printed pages that are printed using the present toner cartridge.
# of pages printer after toner warning The number of printed pages after “The toner is low” warning
is displayed.
Toner Replaced Count
The number of times toner cartridge is replaced.
Drum Rotation Time
The number of times drum cartridge is replaced.
# of drum replacement
The number of drum cartridge replaced times.
Drum Life Time
The drum cartridge rotating seconds.
Custom Size (3 type)
The registered custom size paper.
Order Sheet Setting
The setting of consumable order sheet (Off, Print, Fax, e-mail).
Dealer Service Report
The setting of service report (Off, Fax, e-mail).
3-151
Second page of the detailed report
System Inside Information: Not used for field service.
System History: The latest 10 details, date and time of the following errors
• Scanner jam
• Printer jam
• Service Call error
3-152
Third page of the detailed report
Paper Size and Printed pages:
Note: Some paper size may not be available on this machine.
Items
Detail
Paper size
The paper used for printing
Copy (Every I/C)
The number of pages used for copy. The value in the parenthesis shows the
pages using the current drum. (I/C = Imaging Cartridge)
Fax (Every I/C)
The number of pages used for fax printing. The value in the parenthesis
shows the pages using the current drum. (I/C = Imaging Cartridge)
Pri. (Every I/C)
The number of pages used for PC printing. The value in the parenthesis
shows the pages using the current drum. (I/C = Imaging Cartridge)
LST. (Every I/C)
The number of pages used to print lists. The value in the parenthesis shows
the pages using the current drum. (I/C = Imaging Cartridge)
Sub Total
The total of copy, fax and scan used pages.
TOTAL
The total of all printed pages.
PageCount
The total pages counted according to the counter setting. (If the documents
are legal-sized, the machine will count 5 pages for every 4 sheets.)
Media and Pages Printed:
Items
Medial
Copy
Printer
Detail
The medial (plane paper, Paste board, OHP transparency,
Envelopes / Postcards) for copying and printing.
The number of pages used for copy.
The number of pages used for PC printing.
3-153
Fourth page of the detailed report
# of application copies: The number of times the copy functions are used.
Note: Some functions may not be available on this machine.
Items
Detail
Even Mag.
Even magnification (100%) copy
Alt. Mag.
Alternative magnification (enlarged or reduction) copy
Combine
Combine copy (n-in-1)
Repeat
Repeat copy
Series Copy
Series copy
Shadow Clear
Copy with boarder or center erased
Margin
Copy with binding margin attached
XY Zoom
Directional magnification copy
Nega / Posi
Copy with black and white area reversed
Last job
Copy the last job again
TopUp Copy
TopUp copy
Duplex
Duplex copy
Booklet
Booklet copy
Mix Length
Copy with mixed document size
Fax &Copy
“Fax and copy” function
3-154
Function Count: The number of times advanced fax functions or other functions are used.
Note: Some functions may not be available on this machine.
Items
Detail
Prog. One-touch
Program one-touch function
Speed Tx
Transmission using the Address Book
Group Tx
Transmission using the Address Group
Macro Program
Macro Program
Stamp
Transmission using conformation stamp
Energy save Push
<Energy Save> Key pressed count
Review Key Push
<Fax Cancel/Job Confirm.> Key pressed count
Fax Forwarding
Fax Forwarding function
Delayed Tx
Delayed transmission function
Polling
Polling function
Batch Tx
Batch transmission function
F-Code Tx
F-Code transmission function
FCodePolling
F-Code polling function
Max Number: The maximum numbers used in each function.
Items
Detail
Scanner Pages
The scanned pages
Print Pages
PC printing pages
# of Copies
Copied pages
Broadcast Tx #
The numbers of location in broadcast transmission
Rx File #
The numbers of out-of-paper reception
Reserved Command No The numbers
Registered Number: The numbers registered in each function.
Items
Detail
# of Speed Dial
The registered Address Book locations
# of F-Code
The registered F-code Boxes
# of Key Macro
The registered Macro keys
# of Fax Fwrd.
The registered Fax Forwarding conditions
# of Batch Box
The registered Batch Boxes
# of Group Dial
The registered Address Groups
TWAIN Relative: The number of times the scanner function is used.
Items
Detail
Scan Rate
The scanner used times
600 dpi
The scanner used times in 600 dpi resolution
300 dpi
The scanner used times in 300 dpi resolution
200 dpi
The scanner used times in 200 dpi resolution
100 dpi
The scanner used times in 100 dpi resolution
Text
The scanner used times in “Text” mode for document type
Auto
The scanner used times in “Auto” mode for document type
Photo
The scanner used times in “Photo” mode for document type
3-155
Fifth page of the detailed report
Scan Pages / Rate:
Note: RADF is not available on this machine.
Items
Detail
Copy
The numbers or documents copied and copied times, per ADF, FBS or
RADF.
Fax
The numbers or documents transmitted and transmitted times, per ADF,
FBS or RADF.
Scanner
The numbers or documents scanned in scanner mode and scanned times,
per ADF, FBS or RADF.
Sub Total
The total of copy, fax and scan function.
Total
The total of all scanned documents.
PageCount
The total pages counted according to the counter setting. (If the documents
are legal-sized, the machine will count 5 pages for every 4 sheets.)
Scan Doc. type:
Items
Copy
Fax
Scanner
Scan contrast:
Items
Copy
Fax
Scanner
Detail
The numbers or documents copied per text, Photo and Auto.
The numbers or documents transmitted per normal, fine, Super fine and
Photo.
The numbers or documents scanned per text, Photo and Auto.
Detail
The numbers or documents copied per contrast.
The numbers or documents transmitted per contrast.
The numbers or documents scanned per contrast.
3-156
# of Scanner Jam: The total number of document jam in each location
Communication Info:
Items
Scanner Tx Times
Memory Tx Rate
Tx Times
Rx Times
Tx Pages
Rx Pages
Detail
The number of times for memory transmission.
The number of times for memory transmission.
The total time of transmission per G3, ECM and Super G3.
The total time of reception per G3, ECM and Super G3.
The total pages of transmission per G3, ECM and Super G3.
The total pages of reception per G3, ECM and Super G3.
3-157
Sixth page of the detailed report
# or Errors: Number of errors in transmission per G3, ECM and Super G3.
3-158
Seventh page of the detailed report
# or Errors: Number of errors in reception and dialing per G3, ECM and Super G3.
3-159
3.29 Quick Initial settings
At installation, you should set some parameters according to the following procedures.
You can do the following setting continuously by using this mode.
1.Initial settings
2.Consumable order sheet settings
3.Service Report settings
Note:Before starting the installation settings, clear the memory by pressing <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <2>,
[Enter].
Initial setup
1-1. To start Initial setting mode, press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <9>. The LCD shows:
1-2. Enter the items following the LCD.
See “Initial setup” in the MFP User’s Guide for detailed instructions.
1-3. After you have entered all the items, press [Enter].
Consumable order sheet settings
2-1. The LCD now shows the consumable order sheet setting menu.
2-2. Set, clear or print the consumable order sheet. See “3.16 Consumable order sheet” on page
3-126 for detailed instructions.
2-3. After you have entered all the items, press [Enter].
3-160
Service report settings
3-1. The LCD now shows the service report setting menu.
3-2. Set or clear the service report. See “3.28 Service report” on page 3-144 for detailed instructions.
3-3. After you have entered all the items, press [Enter].
3-161
3.30 Update the software via Network
To update the software for machine or PCL via network, you should follow the following steps:
1.Set up the network (See “3.31.6 Firmware Update Settings” how to set.)
2.Update the software via Network
The update is either through choosing the update version manually (manual update) or specifying the latest
version (latest version update).
Note:In the following conditions, update is not possible
• While the scanner is in use
• While printer is in use
• While transmitting
• While the machine memory is in use
• When the DRAM battery is not charged
3.30.1 Latest version update
Note:Set up the network prior to update. (See “3.31.6 Firmware Update Settings” how to set.)
1.Press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <0>.
2.Select either [Host & Network Board] or [PCL Board].
This screen will not be displayed if the PCL board is not attached. In such case, skip to step 3.
3.Select [Latest Version].
4.Press [Yes].
3-162
5.When the date is copied, machine reboots from itself and the updating begins. DO NOT turn the power off,
until the update is finished.
3.30.2 Manual update
Note:Set up the network prior to update. (See “3.32.6 Firmware Update Settings” how to set.)
1.Press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <0>.
2.Select either [Host & Network Board] or [PCL Board].
This screen will not be displayed if the PCL board is not attached. In such case, skip to step 3.
3.Select [Specified Version].
4.Select [Host Version] .
If you will not update the host version, skip to step 6.
5.Enter your desired ROM version for the machine, and press [Enter].
3-163
6.Select [Network Version].
7. Enter your desired ROM version for the network board, and press [Enter].
8.Press [Enter].
9.Confirm the ROM versions, and press [Yes].
10. When the date is copied, machine reboots from itself and the updating begins. DO NOT turn the power
off, until the update is finished.
3-164
3.31 Update the software
To update the software using your PC, you should follow the following steps:
1.Install the update application on your PC
2.Install the USB driver on your PC
3.Update the software using the PC
The installation is only necessary for the fist time.
In this manual, the details are described with Windows XP. The screen image may differ according to the
Windows version of the PC.
· Windows 98
· Windows 2000
· Windows XP
are available for the updating application.
Note:In the following conditions, update is not possible
• While the scanner is in use
• While printer is in use
• While transmitting
• While the machine memory is in use
3.31.1 Install the update application on PC
To update the software, first install the USB RomWrite application on your PC.
1. Double click the RomWriteSetup.exe icon and start up the Installer Program.
2. Install Shield comes up. Click [Next].
3-165
3. When the installation is completed, click [Finish].
3.31.2 Installing the USB driver on the PC
Install the USB driver to connect the machine and the PC
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <8>, [Enter].
2. Press [Main Board].
3-166
3. Plug the USB cable with the machine and the PC.
When the PC is Windows 98/2000/XP, it detects a new hardware and the following wizard opens. Click
[Next].
4. Select [Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)].
5. Click [Browse] and select the folder where the USB driver for RomWrite is installed.
Note: The driver is placed on the PC when you have installed the application on the PC.
3-167
6. Click [OK].
7. Click [Next]. The driver will be installed on the PC.
3-168
8. Click [Finish] and finish the “Found New Hardware Wizard”.
3-169
3.31.3 Updating the software using the PC
Important: You cannot update the software in following situations:
· The machine is in transmission
· The machine is in scanning or in printing
· Data are stored in memory
In that case, wait until the transmission, scanning or printing ends, or the stored data is transmitted, deleted
or whatever and update the software.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <8>, [Enter].
2. Press [Main Board].
3. Connect your PC and the machine with USB cable.
4.Click [Start] on the PC screen.
3-170
5. Launch the RomWrite application registered in the Startup menu.
6. Click [Browse] and designate the ROM data file.
7. Click [Start].
3-171
The ROM Writer erases the current program in the fax machine, and then writes the new program to the machine.
When the job is completed, the following check-sum table appears.
8. Disconnect your PC from the machine.
9. The machine goes to the Start up screen and the ROM update program starts.
While the machine is updating its ROM, the Energy Save lamp flashes.
When the ROM update is completed, the machine reboots.
10. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Life Monitor] to confirm that the machine has the latest software.
Note: The number differs according to the software version.
3-172
3.31.4 Error code
If the error occurred during writing, the following error code will be appeared:
E.02:
Maker code read error
E.04:
Sector erase error
E.05:
Writing error
E.06:
Sum check error
E.07:
Time out error
When the above error occurred, turn off the power switch, confirm the cable connection, and then perform
from step 1 again.
3-173
3.32 Network Service functions (IP Address : 8000)
The following topics will be covered in this section:
Starting the service functions
Downloading the received faxes
Firmware Update
Modifying the session timer
Changing the OfficeBridge Notification Status to InfoMonitor
OfficeBridge IFAX detailed status
Firmware Update settings
Dial Option Conversion settings
To open the network service screen,
1. Start the web browser on a network computer.
2. Type the machine's IP address in the URL address field followed by “:8000” (colon eight thousand).
e.g. http://192.168.1.10:8000
3. When the window opens enter the following name and password and click [OK].
User name: muratec
Password: service
4. Now the network service settings are available.
3-174
3.32.1 Downloading the received faxes
When the received faxes are stored in image data format on the OfficeBirdge memory, you can retrieve them
using this mode.
The files are contained in folders: One folder contains 100 files. The file names are displayed with hexadecimal numbers.
1. Open the network service screen. (see page 3-174)
2. Click “Retrieve received fax documents”.
3. The folders will be displayed. Click the folder which contains your desired image data.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen to download or display the image data.
3-175
3.32.2 Firmware Update
1. Open the network service screen. (see page 3-174)
2. Click “Firmware-Update”.
3. Click [Browse] to browse the location where the firmware file is located.
4. Click [Open].
IMPORTANT
The fax machine will reboot one time on its own to complete the upgrade. DO NOT turn the fax machine off
during this process.
5. Once the process has completed, confirm that the unit has been upgraded by going back to the original IP
address used in step 2 and view the current software revision.
3.32.3 Modifying the session timer
Modify the session time between the machine and the OfficeBridge users here. The factory default is 30
minutes.
When there is no communication between the machine and the OfficeBridge user during the set time, the
user will forcibly be log out.
Then time can be set between 1 to 1440 minutes (24 hours), however the value will be changed to 10 when
a value smaller than 10 is input.
1. Open the network service screen. (see page 3-174)
2. Click “Modify session timer”.
3. Input the desired value and click [Ok].
3-176
3.32.4 Changing the OfficeBridge Notification Status to InfoMonitor
This function stops the notification of events from OfficeBridge to InfoMonitor. It helps determining failure by
stopping the unnecessary broadcast packet from the InfoMonitor temporarily, in case of network trouble.
IMPORTANT: W
hen stopping the OfficeBridge notification, first shut down the InfoMonitor. Otherwise the access from the InfoMonitor to the OfficeBridge will restart the notification.
1. Open the network service screen. (see page 3-174)
2. Click “OfficeBridge Notification Status to InfoMonitor(s)”.
3. Click [Stop].
3-177
3.32.5 OfficeBridge IFAX detailed status
1. Open the network service screen. (see page 3-174)
2. Click “OfficeBridge IFAX detailed status”.
Items
# of retry
Retry interval
Possible reception size
Insert “X-CIAJWNETFAX” header
Instructions
Set the number of times to retry sending the internet
fax when a memory overflow occurred or a socket error
occurred.
Set the retry interval sending the internet fax when a
memory overflow occurred or a socket error occurred.
To restrict the mail size, set it here. The available range
is from 1 – 8 MB. When “Auto” is selected, the size will
be distinguished from the image memory capacity of
the Host and the capacity of SDRAM of the NGP board
automatically.
To add a X-CIAJWNETFAX header always, set this
function to “On”.
This header is usually added only to IFAX that default body
and message are edited, so that the other machine will not
print the message.
Tx E-Mail MIME char setting
When this function is “On”, the body and message will not
be printed on the partner's IFAX machine even if the user
has edited them. (Other companies IFAX may print them.)
Select which code to use when transmitting characters
other than ASCII code.
Select “LATIN9(ISO-8859-15)” only when the user wants to
use this code.
When only ASCII code is used, the message is transmitted
with US-ASCII regardless of this setup.
Note: See the codes on the next page.
MDN Expired Time (This function is Set the time which after that the MDN will be printed
effective only with OB2 models)
respectively. The available time is from 0 to 72 hours.
When MDN is demanded in IFAX transmission for several
addresses, MDN, which will be received within this set up
time, will be printed together in one list.
If the time is set up to 0, MDN will be printed every time
when it is received.
3-178
3-179
3-180
3.32.6 Firmware Update Settings
To update the machine via network, set the items first.
1.Open the network service screen. (see page 3-174)
2.Click “Firmware Update via Network Server Settings”.
3.Enter the necessary information.
Note: MAI dealers have a default value entered.
See “3.29 Update the software via Network” how to update the machine using the network.
3-181
3.32.7 Convert dialling characters in e-mail gateway functions
The following dialling characters will be converted to certain characters specified here:
Pause (/P)
Tone (/T)
Flash (/F)
1. Open the network service screen. (see page 3-174)
2. Click “Dial Option Conversion”.
3. Enter the characters to which the machine should convert the dialling character.
4. Click “Save” to save the setting.
Note:
• Up to two characters are able to enter for each dialling character.
• For available characters, see table below.
• If the box is blank, the dialling characters will be override when transmitting over the e-mail gateway.
3-182
4 Troubleshooting Procedures
4.1 Troubleshooting Outline
Before troubleshooting a unit check the following:
• Is the power cord correctly connected to the machine?
• Are the telephone handset and the telephone line cord connected correctly?
• Is there paper in the paper cassette?
• Are all covers closed correctly?
Before removing any portions of the machine or making any adjustments be sure the
power cord is disconnected from the unit. Check the following:
• The power source should be rated according to unit specifications.
• The unit should not be connected to an electrical circuit with other equipment or where voltages may
vary.
• The unit should be installed on a flat, level surface.
• The ambient temperature and relative humidity surrounding the unit should be 50°F to 89.6°F (10°C to
32°C) at 20% to 80% humidity with no condensation.
• The unit should be located in a well ventilate area.
• The unit should receive necessary cleaning and maintenance.
The unit should be installed:
• Away from heat sources and heating or cooling vents.
• Away from water heaters, steam generators, humidifiers or other areas of high humidity.
• Away from dusty areas.
• Away from areas where chemical fumes or gasses are generated or may collect.
• Away from areas exposed to direct sunlight.
Check the consumable:
• Verify that the recording paper supply is adequate and that it conforms to the type specified for use
in the machine.
• Verify that the recording paper has been stored away from moisture and damp areas.
• Verify that the recording paper has not been damaged in any way.
4-1
4.2 Recording Paper Jam
Symptom: Recording paper did not exit paper cassette properly or jam occurred in print area.
Suggested corrective action:
1. Verify that the recording paper conforms to the type specified for use in the machine, and that has
not been damaged or exposed to moisture.
2. Make sure the recording paper is properly loaded into the bypass tray and cassette and the cassette is properly closed.
3. Clean the paper feed rollers of any paper dust buildup. (Clean using a lint-free cotton cloth moistened with a cleaning designed for use on rubber rollers.) Replace the paper feed rollers if worn or
damaged.
4. Check the paper guide in the cassette is adjusted properly to the paper and operation is done.
5. Verify that the paper has reached sensor PSS. If it has, check the operation of PSS.
6. Verify the paper take up roller is turning. If not, check the main motor. If the main motor is turning,
check the operation of the paper feed solenoid PFCL.
7. If the main motor does not turn, replace the main motor, the power supply unit or the main control
PCB.
8. Check for obstructions in the paper path.
Symptom: Recording paper jammed as it was exiting the unit into receive paper tray.
Suggested corrective action:
1. Check for obstruction in the paper path.
2. Check the paper discharge sensor (PDS) for proper operation.
3. Clean the exit roller using a lint-free cloth moistened with a cleaning solution designed for use on
rubber rollers. Replace the exit roller if worn or damaged.
4. Verify the fuser rollers are clean and not damaged. If worn or damaged, replace the fuser.
4.3 Document Feeder Jam
Symptom: Original document did not feed into or exit scanner properly, document feeder error message.
Suggested corrective action:
1. Verify the original documents conform to the specifications designed for use in the machine and
that they are not damaged in any way.
2. Verify the number of documents placed into the feeder does not exceed its maximum capacity.
3. Verify the scanner cover is closed properly.
4. Remove any foreign substances from inside the scanner area.
5. Verify that all of the document feed rollers are clean and not damaged. Clean using a lint-free cotton cloth moistened with a cleaning solution designed for use on rubber rollers. Replace the rollers
if worn or damaged.
6. Check the operation of DS1 at connector P82, pins 3-5, on the Connect A PCB.
7. Check the operation of the separator roller, and the pick-up roller.
8. Verify the operation to the ADF Motor at connector P82, pins 8-12, on the Connect A PCB.
9. Verify that the document feeds into the unit and stops. If the document does not stop, check the operation of DS2 at connector P82, pins 6-8, on the Connect A PCB.
10. Check all connectors and cables.
11. Check the operation of the main control board.
4-2
4.4 Document Feeder Multi-feeding or Skew
Symptom: Two or more pages of a multi-page document are fed at once.
The document is fed on the skew. Slight skewing may sometimes occur.
Suggested corrective action:
1. Verify that the original documents conform to the specifications designed for use in the machine
and they are not damaged in any way.
2. Verify the pages of the document are not stuck together from glue, wet or damp correction fluid,
tape, etc.
3. Verify the feed roller, separator roller and separator pad are clean and not damaged. Clean using
a lint-free cotton cloth moistened with a cleaning solution designed for on rubber rollers. Replace
these items if worn or damaged.
4.5 Mirror Carriage Error (MFX-2050/MFX-1450 only)
Symptom: The mirror carriage doesn’t move.
Suggested corrective action:
1. Verify that the scanner unit locking switch has been released. Release the scanner unit locking
switch if it is not released. Then press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <4> to turn off the mirror carriage carry
mode.
2. Verify that the timing belt doesn’t out of joint.
3. Check the operation of HOME sensor at connector P2, pin 1-3, on the CCD PCB.
4.6 Clearing Jammed Paper
4.6.1 If the original document jams
1.If an original document jams in the ADF while scanning the document into the memory for faxing or
copying, the LCD will show:
If you do wish to continue the operation, press [Yes] and proceed to step 2.
To abort the operation, press [No]. This will erase from memory all pages stored during this operation, and the machine will return to standby mode.
Important:If you wait more than 60 seconds without pressing any key, the machine will erase from
memory all pages stored during this operation and the machine will return to the standby
mode.
Note:If the document jammed in the following case, the following message will appear and the
machine will abort the operation anyway; instead, you’ll have to perform the job again from
scratch.
• The first page of the document jammed
• During the real time transmission or quick memory transmission
• During non-sorting ADF job
4-3
Also, the “Repeat transmission. Error on scan at page xx” message will be printed out if the document jammed during transmission.
2.The LCD will show which page (i. e., which page number) is jammed. To continue scanning from
the jammed page forward (keeping in mind the Note at the end of step 1, above), press [Start] after
clearing the jam.
Note:If you wait more than 60 seconds without pressing any key, the machine will begin to send or
copy the document(s) it has.
If you wish to cancel this operation, press [Cancel]. The machine will delete all pages from memory
and then return to its standby mode.
4.6.2 If a printout jams inside your machine
1.If paper jams occur the LCD will show:
Follow these procedures to clear the paper jam.
If a paper jam occurs during fax reception, the machine will store the received document in the
memory and printout them automatically when you have cleared the paper jam.
CAUTION:When you open the side cover to remove the paper, DO NOT touch the fuser roller.
Important:Do not touch the drum cartridge surface. Scratches or smudges will result in poor print
quality.
Removing jammed paper
To clear a printout jammed inside your machine:
1.Pull the release lever to open the side cover.
4-4
If the optional second cassette is attached, also open the 2nd side cover.
2.Carefully remove the jammed paper in the direction shown.
Note:Avoid getting unfixed toner on your hands and clothes when removing jammed paper.
Jammed in feed area
Jammed in fuser area
Jammed in paper exit area
4-5
If the jammed paper was fed a little and you cannot seize it easily:
3.Open the paper cassette. After you pull it out completely, lift the front part of the cassette slightly up
to release the cassette from the machine.
4.Carefully remove the jammed paper.
5. Close the side cover and insert the paper cassette. Lower the rear part of the cassette to align the
rear edge to the slot of the machine, then insert it completely.
4-6
4.7 Cleaning the Unit
Use a mild cleaning solution on a lint-free cloth to wipe the machine’s cover, handset and paper cassette
tray. Never spray cleaner directly onto the fax machine as the spray could damage components inside the
fax.
4.7.1 Cleaning the Document glass, ADF glass and Sheet Document
Press
1.Open the platen cover.
2.Get a soft, lint-free cloth and moisten it with isopropyl alcohol.
Important:Make sure the cloth doesn’t have any rough areas. Otherwise, it could scratch the glass
surface of the FBS.
3.Using the cloth, gently clean the Document glass and the ADF glass.
Document pad
ADF glass
ADF glass
Document glass
MFX-2050/1450
F-565/525
4.7.2 Cleaning the drum chare wire and LED print head
If there are streaks on your print, the drum charge wire and LED print head may require cleaning.
1.Open the front cover.
2.Gently pull the cleaning rod to and fro fully to the end several times.
Instruction A
Pull the blue rod toward
you,making sure it fully
extends.
2 Return the rod to its
original position.
1
3.Close the front cover.
4.8 Transmit Error
Symptom: Check message prints after attempting transmission.
Suggested corrective action:
1. Reference the error code on the check massage or the journal to the error code list contained in
this section.
4-7
4.9 LCD Error Messages
Your fax machine’s LCD messages can help you spot problems.
LCD error messages (Alphabetic list)
Message on the display
[Sort] must be turned On when
making a duplex copy.
Add/Edit cannot be performed.
ADF is unavailable
Set the document on the FBS glass
Already stored
An attachment cannot be scanned to
the folder from which it was added.
An I.D.Code is needed
An LDAP server has not been
registered.Check the LDAP server
settings.
An LDAP server has not been
selected.Check the LDAP server
settings.
An LDAP server must be registered
Auto ratio is set.
Box in use.
Broadcast cannot be turned off.
Calibrating Scanner
Call Service :Code
Cannot change the setting for Rx
separator cassette.
Cannot combine with Card copy
Cannot enter additional commands
Cannot find the domain
Cannot select mode during Fax&Copy
Cannot store in a secure box.
Cannot use the same code for both
Read/Write and Read Only.
Check Paper Source
Check the paper size.
Open & Close Front cover.
Description / Solution
You tried to set [Sort] to [OFF] while Duplex Copy. Duplex Copy
should be combined with sort.
You cannot add/enter destinations to the Address Book while
selecting other destinations.
You tried to make a Card Copy using the ADF. Use the document
glass.
You tried to select a number that has already been selected. Enter
a different number.
You tried to scan to folder with files attached and save them to the
same folder where the attached files are originally saved.
You cannot set “0000” as an I.D. Code for Security box.
The advanced search failed due to an internal machine error.
Check the LDAP server setting again, and try the search again.
For more information about LDAP server set up, refer to the MFP
User’s Guide or PC User’s Guide.
LDAP server has not been set up. To use the advanced search,
set up the LADP server on your machine prior to searching. For
more information, refer to the MFP User’s Guide or PC User’s
Guide.
Auto ratio is selected automatically.
To specify the zoom ratio, press [Zoom] and enter your desired
zoom ratio.
You tried to erase an F-Code box which contains at least one
document. Erase the document(s), then try again.
You tried to set Broadcast to [OFF] after multiple destinations have
been selected.
The scanner is warming up now
An internal error has occurred. See “4.11 Service Call Error” on
page 4-17 how to solve the problem.
The cassette/tray you selected is used for separator page. Select
other cassette/tray.
Your selected function cannot be combined with card copy.
The stored commands are full. Wait until one or more jobs are
done.
DHCP configuration failed. Check the Network setting. For more
information, refer to the MFP User’s Guide or PC User’s Guide.
You tried to switch the mode to others while Fax&Copy mode.
Changing mode in Fax&Copy is not available.
You tried to store a document in an F-code Secure box. If you
need to store documents, use an F-code Bulletin box.
You cannot use the same protect code for “Read/Write” and “Read
Only”. Enter a different one.
The selected paper is not suitable for copying or printing. Select
other paper source.
The loaded paper does not match the paper registered in the
machine. Set correct sized paper or change the paper size setting.
Open and close the front cover to reset the printer.
4-8
Message on the display
Close XXX Cover
Close XXX cassette
Close the Scanner Unit
Communication error
Communication in progress.
Contact service for printer option
Continue to store?
[Yes] [No]
Copy protected
Copy reservation has been disabled.
Cover Open
DHCP server did not respond.
Dialing number has not been set.
Document full
Document stored
Drum should be replaced.
Enter location.
Enter the end day.
Enter the end time.
Enter the start day.
Enter the start time.
Enter the sub-address
Error
Error on Printing
Feeder In Use
Follow Instruction A
Incorrect passcode
Invalid Address Book Location!
Description / Solution
The cover indicated on the display is open or has not been closed
securely. Close it properly.
The paper cassette indicated on the LCD is open or has not been
closed securely. Close it properly.
The scanner unit is open. Close the scanner unit.
A communication error disrupted the reception or transmission. If
you were transmitting, press <Stop> to clear the error message
and then re-try the transmission. If you were receiving a fax, try to
contact the other person and have him/her re-try the transmission.
The function is not available during communication. Wait until it
ends.
An internal error has occurred.
The document has jammed while being stored into memory. To
continue storing press [Yes], to cancel the job press [No].
Copy is protected. To copy, set [Copy protect] to [OFF].
During copy protection, Macro program is disabled.
Copy reservation is disable. Wait until the present job is completed.
Close XXX Cover
The cover indicated on the LCD is open or has not been closed
securely. Close it properly.
DHCP configuration failed. Check the network connection. If the
LAN cable is not connected, connect it to the machine to connect
to the LAN. If the DHCP server is not installed on your network,
turn off the “DHCP setting” and register the IP address manually.
For more information, refer to the MFP User’s Guide or PC User’s
Guide.
You are selecting a non-registered address book number. Check
the address book number and try again.
You tried to store a document in a Batch Tx box, but the machine
has reached its capacity (40 documents). Delete unnecessary
documents stored or use other Batch Tx box.
You tried to erase a batch box which contains at least one
document. To erase a batch box, erase all the documents stored in
the box.
The drum cartridge has run out. Replace with a new drum
cartridge.
No destinations are entered. Enter at least one destination to
register the setting.
The end forwarding day is not entered in Fax forward setting.
The end forwarding time is not entered in Fax forward setting.
The start forwarding day is not entered in Fax forward setting.
The start forwarding time is not entered in Fax forward setting.
You tried to create an F-code box without entering a sub-address.
Sub-address is a required field.
The image transfer failed. Check the printed out “Check Massage”
to identify the error.
You cannot print a file that is larger than 10 MB. User PC print
function to print the file.
– or –
Memory has overflowed during printing. Try again later.
There is a manual delayed transmission reserved in the ADF. Wait
until the job is finished, or cancel the delayed transmission by
removing the document.
Follow the instruction that will be displayed on the screen to clean
the charge wire.
The entered passcode is wrong. Enter the correct passcode.
A non-registered address book number is selected. Either choose
another number or manually dial the number.
4-9
Message on the display
Invalid characters have been entered.
Invalid I.D.code
Invalid number!
Invalid Paper Size
Invalid parameters!
Jam Recover.
Set the document. Press [Start].
From Page :
[Start] [Cancel]
Lamp error. Call for service.
LDAP reference execution error
Link Path is required.
Load XXX paper
Load paper
Load paper for reception
Load paper in the bypass tray
Load paper into the XXX cassette
Macro in use
Mail transmission error
Memory full. Printing will resume
when mem. is free.Press [OnLine] to
stop.
Memory overflow Rx
Memory overflow.
Memory overflow. Number of stored
page: Store these pages?
[Yes] [No]
Name is required
No command stored
No document stored
No Drum Cartridge
Description / Solution
You entered invalid characters. To register a Shortcut, insert the
PC name between “//” and “/”. To register a File Name, special
characters such as “\”, “/”, “:”, “*”, “?”, “<”, “>” or “|” cannot be
entered. To register NetBIOS characters other than the alphabet
and numbers between 1 to 9.
The F-code box I.D. code you entered is not valid. Try re-entering
your F-code box I.D. code.
You entered a number which is not valid for the current operation.
The selected paper is not suitable for duplex printing. Select other
paper source. Select plain paper in the regular size.
You entered an invalid value or pressed [Enter] without entering a
value.
– or –
The advanced search failed due to an internal machine error.
Check the LDAP server setting, and try the search again. For more
information about LDAP server set up, refer to the MFP User’s
Guide or PC User’s Guide.
You selected to continue the job. The machine is instructing you
from which page to set the document. Set the document again from
that page that the machine is indicating you and press <Start>. To
cancel and finish the job, press [Cancel].
The scanner lamp is dim or not operating.
Make repeated copies to help evaporate any internal moisture. If
that doesn’t resolve the problem, replace the lamp.
The advanced search failed due to an internal machine error. Try
the search again.
You tried to register a shortcut without entering [Link]. To register a
Folder or FTP server shortcut, you should enter the [Link].
Load the paper specified by the machine.
There is no paper either in the cassette or in the bypass tray. Load
paper.
The paper run out during fax reception. Load paper.
There is no paper either in the cassette or in the bypass tray. Load
paper.
There is no paper in the XXX cassette. Load paper in it.
You cannot press [Macro Program] while you are registering a
Macro.
The transmission failed. Check the printed out “Check Massage” to
identify the error.
There is not enough memory to store the print job. Wait until some
reserved jobs are finished and the memory becomes free.
Memory has overflowed during the fax reception.
Press <Stop> to return the standby screen.
You tried to enter more pages into memory than your machine
could store.
You tried to store more pages into memory than your machine
could store. Press [Yes] to keep the scanned pages in memory,
or press [No] to delete all pages stored during this operation. The
display shows how many pages are stored.
You need to enter a name for the registration.
You pressed <Fax Cancel/Job Confirm.> to review upcoming
commands, but your machine has no command stored.
You tried to print a document from memory, but your machine has
no documents in storage.
The drum cartridge is missing or has not been properly installed in
your machine. Please properly install the drum cartridge.
4-10
Message on the display
No Drum Cartridge
No paper type set on the PC
On XXXX
Please set paper (Letter Plain)
To cancel select [Cancel]
No paper type set on the PC
Please set paper (XXXX)
To cancel select [Cancel]
No polling document
No protect passcode
No report
No Toner Cartridge
Not enough memory
Not registered
Nothing has been selected
Nothing has been stored
Open & Close Scanner Cover
Reset your document
Open front Cover
Paper Count Error
Paper size error for XXXX
On XXXX
Please set paper (YYYY)
To cancel select [Cancel]
PC Printing Canceled
Phone connection terminated
PIN has not been registered.
Please Check File:
Decode Error
Please enter a value between
25-100%
Please enter a value between
25-400%
Please enter text.
Description / Solution
The drum cartridge is missing or has not been properly installed in
your machine. Please properly install the drum cartridge.
The cassette/tray selected for printing is empty. Please set the
paper indicated in the message and print your job, or press
[Cancel] to cancel.
The paper selected for printing is not set to the machine. Please
set the paper indicated in the message and print your job, or press
[Cancel] to cancel.
You tried to print out or delete a polling document when there is no
polling document in memory.
To protect the setting of User Access / Cost accounting, Security
reception or to mask the PIN, you need to set the protect passcode
in advance.
You requested an activity journal or transmit confirmation report,
but your machine has no record of any fax jobs occurring.
The toner cartridge is missing or has not been properly installed in
your machine. Please properly install the toner cartridge.
The machine cannot store documents into memory any more.
Delete unnecessary documents stored or wait until a reserved job
is done.
You pressed a key which is not programmed with any command.
– or –
You tried to delete a non-registered item. Non-registered items
cannot be deleted.
You tried to press [Enter], when nothing has been selected. To
change the settings or to select destinations, first select items from
the list, then press [Enter].
You tried to display the jobs in queue, when there is no job.
A document has jammed in the ADF. Follow the instruction on the
display and removed the jammed document.
Open the front cover. The cover position is located on the display.
The scanned page numbers for the first side and the back side of
the documents did not match.
Fan the document to prevent more than one sheet being drawn
trough at a time, and try the operation again.
The cassette/tray selected for printing has no suitable paper for
printing the job. Please set the paper indicated in the message and
print your job, or press [Cancel] to cancel.
In PC printing, the size of paper in the paper cassette does not
match up the paper size you specified by the printer driver. Press
[Stop] to cancel a print job. Then load the correct paper size and
try printing the document again.
The telephone connected to the machine is hanging up. Hang it
down.
You selected “Mode1” in the PIN mask feature and tried to call an
address book number in which no PIN has been entered, or to call
using numeric keys without a PIN. Enter a PIN.
The file you have tired to print is not compatible with the “Print on
Demand” function.
“Print on Demand” only supports files that were originally scanned
by an F-525, F-565, MFX-1450 or MFX-2050 as a TIFF or PDF file
(Color PDF images are not compatible with this feature). Use PC
print function to print the file.
The value you entered exceeds the Zoom range. Enter a value
within the range.
The value you entered exceeds the Zoom range. Enter a value
within the range.
You cannot view the text when there is no text entered. Enter
the text in advance.
4-11
Message on the display
Please install the drum cartridge
correctly.
Please install the toner cartridge
correctly.
Please Remove Paper
Please set up Security Reception
Please Supply Paper
Please wait...
Preparing
Press [Stop] to end the job.
Press the Fax Cancel key to stop
the transmission.
Printer in use
Printer Jam.
Ratio is set to 100%.
Real time transmissions cannot be
archived.
Real time TX in progress. Cannot
print.
Replace the drum
Reset the document
Rx document stored
Scanner Adjusting
Scanner in use
Select Paper Size
Select paper source
Server Initializing
Set document in the ADF
Set individual forwarding numbers
first
Set paper: XXXX
Set the Read/Write Code first.
Description / Solution
The drum cartridge is missing or has not been properly installed
in your machine.
Please properly install the drum cartridge.
The toner cartridge is missing or has not been properly installed
in your machine. Please properly install the toner cartridge.
Paper has jammed in the machine. Follow the instruction on the
display and removed the jammed paper.
The Security Reception is not set up. To use this function set
up Security Reception in advance.
There is no paper either in the cassette or in the bypass tray.
Load paper.
Your machine’s printer is either warming up or busy. Please
wait until the machine is finished printing and then re-try your
command or operation.
Your machine’s printer is either warming up or busy. Please
wait until the machine is finished printing and then re-try your
command or operation.
Document remains from the operation prior to the interrupt.
Press <Stop> to discharge the document.
Pressed <Stop> during fax transmission. Cancel the
transmission by <Fax Cancel/Job Confirm.>.
The machine cannot execute the job while printing. Wait until
the printing is finished and re-try the operation.
Paper has jammed. Follow the guidance on the display and
remove the paper.
The zoom ratio is set to 100%. To change the zoom ratio, set it
again.
You tried to send a fax using real time transmission or set
memory transmission to [OFF] when the archive function is set
up.
To archive the document, use memory transmission.
The machine cannot print out the job until the current
communication finishes. Please wait.
The drum cartridge has run out. Replace with a new drum
cartridge.
Remove the document from the ADF, and set them again.
To set the security reception to [OFF], first print out the stored
security receipted document.
Your machine’s scanner is preparing. Please wait until the
machine is ready.
The machine cannot execute the job until the current job
finishes. Please wait.
The selected paper is not suitable for the document. Select
other paper.
There is no paper that fits the copying document. Select on
which paper to copy or load paper.
The machine’s network is now preparing. Please wait until it is
ready.
You tried to make a [2-> 2side] or [2 -> 1side] copy using the
document glass. Those copy are only available from the ADF.
The Fax Forward is not set up. To use this function, set up the
forwarding condition in advance.
There is no paper in the bypass tray. Load the paper indicated
on the display.
You tired to create a “Read Only” protect code prior to “Read/
Write” code. Create a “Read/Write” code first.
4-12
Message on the display
Description / Solution
Setting must be changed from the
browser
When the machine is on the Network, you cannot set Fax
Forwarding from the machine side. Use the browser for the
setting.
Supply Separator Paper in XXXX
The paper for separator reception has run out. Load paper in
the designate cassette/tray.
The drum is low.
Your drum will need to be replaced soon.
The following data is required:
The fax number or e-mail address is not registered to the
Fax or e-mail
Address Book. Either fax number or e-mail address must be
registered.
The following data is required:
The fax number with PIN number or e-mail address is not
Fax or e-mail, PIN number
registered to the Address Book in PIN mask mode 1. Either fax
number or e-mail address must be registered. For fax numbers,
the PIN number must also be entered after entering the fax
number and an “*” (asterisk).
The LDAP server cannot be found.
The advanced search failed due to an internal machine error.
Check the LDAP server settings.
Check the LDAP server setting again, and try the search again.
For more information about LDAP server set up, refer to the
MFP User’s Guide or PC User’s Guide.
The NetBIOS name entered is
The NetBIOS name conflicts with other device. Contact your
already in use.
Network Administrator.
The number of file attachments and/ You can add up to 10 network files (or up to 10 MB worth of
or file size limit has been exceeded. files) to the scanned job. Delete files so that it meets the limit.
Please delete attachments until you
reach the acceptable limit.
The number of the browse results
You browsed a folder where too many files or folders are
exceeds the limit.
located. To scan to the folder, register the folder as a shortcut
using the [Keypad] or select another folder. To attach files from
the folder, copy the files to a new folder and attach them.
The numeric keypad cannot be
You cannot use numeric keys while selecting group members.
used.
The storing process has not
The machine cannot execute the job until the current job
finished.
finishes. Please wait.
The toner is empty.
Toner is empty. Replace with a new toner cartridge.
The toner is low.
The machine is almost out of toner.
Prepare a new toner cartridge.
There are no vacant numbers.
You have already registered 300 locations to the Address
Book. To register a new location, first delete the unnecessary
locations first.
There is no applicable data.
You selected a key on the index, to which no destination is
categorized.
This function cannot be used.
You selected a function that is currently not available. Change
the function you set prior to this function or cancel this function.
This Resolution cannot fit specified
You try to set a resolution that is not available in the set zoom
Zoom value.
ratio. Change either the resolution or the zoom ratio to do the
job.
This setting is protected
The User Access / Cost accounting setting is protected. To
change the setting, release the protection.
To initialize IP address you must
IP address is entered or edited. Power off and then on to save
shutdown.
the setting.
Toner should be replaced.
Toner is empty. Replace with a new toner cartridge.
Too many characters
You entered more characters than the limit. Re-enter them so
that it contains the limit.
Too many locations.
You entered more location than the limit. Re-enter them so that
it contains the limit.
TTI data has not been registered
The Transmit Terminal Identifier (TTI) is not registered. To
select the TTI, register the TTI in advance.
Unable to delete
The job you selected was carried out before deleting.
Use the scanner glass
You tried to make a zoom up copy using the ADF. To make a
zoom up copy, use the document glass.
4-13
4.10 Error Codes
If an error occurs during a communication, a check message will be printed. The following provides an
explanation of the information found on check messages.
•
A possible solution to the problem
•
The date and time of the attempted communication
•
The sending location (if the remote fax has a Location ID)
•
The number of pages which got through before the error terminated the call
•
The error code
•
The sample document.
You will also see a code listed in the Result column of the report. Result codes indicate the specific problem
encountered:
•
“D” codes occur while dialing
•
“R” codes occur during reception
•
“T” codes occur during transmission
Here is a list of error codes the fax machine may print.
4.10.1 Dialing errors
D.0.2
The remote unit is busy. Try the call again.
D.0.3,
D.0.8
The remote unit didn’t respond, the call couldn’t be completed or stop was pressed during
dialing. Retry the call. If your machine repeats the message, call the remote fax unit’s operator
and verify that unit is operating properly.
Either the remote unit didn’t respond, the call somehow didn’t go through or <Stop> was
pressed during dialing. Try the call again.
D.0.6,
D.0.7
4-14
4.10.2 Reception errors
R.1.1
T1 time-out. The calling unit was not a fax machine or the transmitting unit is having
difficulties.
R.1.2
The two fax machines were incompatible. Your machine sends and receives only ITU-T
Group 3 fax communication, the industry standard since the early 1980s.
R.1.4
Someone pressed <Stop> during fax reception.
R.2.3
Poor phone line conditions made fax communication impossible. Enable the one second
pause after CED on Memory Switch 020. Also try increasing the echo wait time on Memory
Switch 021 if echo is on the line.
R.3.1
No response to CFR. DCN was received from the transmitter. Poor line conditions made
communication impossible. Adjust the echo wait time on Memory Switch 021. Try increasing
the output levels via Machine Parameter 001.
R.3.3
Too many errors were detected during data reception. The carrier was interrupted. Increase
the data error rate on Memory Switch 020.
R.3.4
DCN was received after FTT. Communication was not possible at 2400 bps. Poor phone line
conditions prevented fax communication. Enable the Eye Quality Check on Memory Switch
031 and 032.
R.4.1
The machine received too large length data that over your machine’s limit.
R.4.2
MPS/EOM/EOP was not received. Either the line disconnected before reception was
completed or too many errors were detected by the receiving unit. Adjust the data error rate
on Memory Switch 020. It may also be necessary to decrease the receive communication
speed via Memory Switch 020.
R.4.4
The receiving fax machine has reached its memory capacity.
R.5.1
DCN was received instead of RR during ECM communication.
R.5.2
Line noise or other problems prevented ECM reception.
R.8.1
A compatibility error occurred.
R.8.10
Line noise or other problems prevented line probing.
R.8.11
The fax machine timed out while waiting for the retrain signal.
4-15
4.10.3 Transmission errors
T.1.1
T1 time-out. The remote fax machine didn’t respond to your machine. This usually occurs
during a manual transmission or when an incorrect number was dialed. Call someone at the
remote machine.
T.1.4
Someone pressed <Stop> during fax transmission.
T.2.1
CFR or FTT was not received from the remote machine. Either the phone line disconnected
during fax communication or transmission became impossible due to bad phone line
conditions. Try the call again. It may be necessary to increase the output levels on Machine
Parameter 001. The receive machine may also have closed network or block junk fax
enabled.
T.2.2
The two fax machines were incompatible. No mailbox at receiver or security transmission is
enabled.
T.2.3
FTT was received from the remote machine at 2400 bps. Bad phone line conditions made
fax communication impossible. Conditions can change rapidly, so try the call later. Turn on
the echo protect tone on Memory Switch 010. Also adjust the interval between DCS and TCF
on Memory Switch 011. If the problem persists, try increasing the output levels on Machine
Parameter 001.
T.3.1
The page counter in the fax machine detected a document feeder error during transmission.
Carefully re-insert the document into the feeder and re-try the call.
T.4.1
No response to MPS/EOP/EOM. Poor phone lines caused the receiving unit to disconnect.
Adjust the interval between CFR and data on Memory Switch 011. Try increasing the output
levels on Machine Parameter 001. It may also be necessary to adjust the transmit speed on
Memory Switch 010.
T.4.2
RTN was received from the remote machine. After transmission began, poor line conditions
developed. Try the call again. Attempt the solutions described for the T.4.1 error.
T.4.4
Poor line conditions prevented transmission. PIP was received. The transmission was
interrupted by the call mode. The receiving unit may be experiencing problems. Try the call
again.
T.5.1
No response to RR from the remote machine. Line noise or other problems prevented ECM
transmission. Increase the ECM response time on Memory Switch 012.
T.5.2
No response to CTC. Line noise or other problems prevented ECM transmission. Increase the
ECM response time on Memory Switch 012.
T.5.3
EOR was received from the remote unit but further transmission was not possible. Adjust
Memory Switch 015 for this problem.
T.8.1
A compatibility error occurred.
T.8.10
Line noise or other problems prevented line probing.
T.8.11
The remote fax machine didn’t complete the equalizer training phase.
4-16
4.11 Service Call Error
When certain machine problems occur these message will appear in the LCD.
4.11.1 Please Call Service XX
XX stands for a code which describes an error message:
Code
1:
2: 3: 4: 5: Error Message
RX Motor Error
Fan Error
Fuser Error
Drum Error
Developer Error
When certain machine problems occur a “Please Call Service” message will appear in the LCD. When this
message appears, access the printer maintenance mode / Service call function to determine the cause of
the “Please Call Service” error message.
To access the printer maintenance modes:
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <6>.
2. Press [Service Call].
3. The kind of printer error will be displayed. If happens two or more troubles, the number of troubles
is displayed on the right upper of the LCD. For example, when “Heater error” and “Drum Fuse
Error” has occurred, the LCD shows 2.
2
Number of troubles
4. Press [Enter] to show the other printer error.
5. Press <Reset> to exit this mode.
Note :To let the error noticed via e-mail, see “3.9 Printer maintenance mode” on page 3-108 how to
set is up.
4-17
RX Motor Error
Suggested corrective action:
1. Check the connection between RX motor and the Connect A PCB (P90).
2. Verify the RX motor rotates when the power is on. If OK, see step 6.
3. Check the power is supplied to the Rx motor. If it does not, see step 5.
4. Replace the RX motor if it doesn’t rotate.
5. Replace the Connect A PCB.
6. If the problem is not correct, replace the main control board.
Fan Error
Suggested corrective action:
1. Verify the inside fan rotates when the power is on.
2. Check the connection between the fan and Connect A PCB(P87), Connect A PCB (P80C) and the
main board.
3. Replace the fan motor if it doesn’t rotate.
4. Replace the Connect A PCB.
5. Replace the main control board.
Fuser Error
Suggested corrective action:
1. Turn on the power again, and verify the fuser warms up. If it does not, see step 4.
2. Check the contact between Fusing thermistor and Connect A PCB(P89).
3. Check the contact between Connect A PCB (P80C) and the main board.
4. Replace the Fuser.
5. After replacing the Fuser, verify the fuser warms up when the power is on.
6. Replace the main control PCB.
4-18
Drum Error
Suggested corrective action:
1. Verify the drum cartridge is set correctly.
2. Check the point of contacts between drum cartridge and Connect A PCB (P86).
3. Check the contact between Connect A PCB (P80C) and the main board.
4. Replace the drum cartridge.
5. Replace the Connect A PCB.
6. Replace the main control PCB.
Developer Error
Suggested corrective action:
1. Verify the toner cartridge is set correctly.
2. Check the point of contacts between toner cartridge and Connect A PCB (P86).
3. Check the contact between Connect A PCB (P80C) and the main board.
4. Replace the toner cartridge.
5. Replace the Connect A PCB.
6. Replace the main control PCB.
4-19
4.12 The Image Quality Problems
The following provides guidelines for troubleshooting the printer engine and actions to be taken. Before
removing any portions of the machine or making any internal adjustments, be sure power to the unit is OFF.
Suggested corrective actions should be performed in order as listed. Most conditions can be corrected by
performing routine preventative maintenance steps. If printer or print quality problems occur, check the
following.
The unit:
1.Should have the power cord correctly connected.
2.Should be connected to a power source which is rated to machine specifications.
3.Should be installed on a flat, level surface.
4.Should receive good ventilation.
5.Should not be connected to an electrical circuit with other equipment or where voltages may vary.
6.Should not be installed near a direct heating or cooling source or vent.
7.Should not be exposed to high dust concentration.
8.Should not be exposed to direct sunlight
9.Should not be exposed to high temperatures, high humidity, steam or chemical fumes.
4.12.1 Blank pages
Symptom: Page is solid white.
Poor development
• The drum cartridge or toner cartridge may be not installed correctly. Install
each cartridge correctly.
• Replace the Toner cartridge.
Improper LED exposure
• Replace the LED Print Head Unit.
• Replace the Main Control PCB.
Improper charging
• Replace the High Voltage Unit.
• Replace the Main Control PCB.
4.12.2 Black pages
Symptom: Page is solid black.
Improper LED exposure
• Replace the LED Print Head Unit.
• Replace the Main Control PCB.
Improper charging
• Replace the High Voltage Unit.
• Replace the Main Control PCB.
4-20
4.12.3 Printout too light
Symptom: Printed image is faint or does not print solid.
Poor development
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
• The drum cartridge or toner cartridge may be not installed correctly. Install
each cartridge correctly.
• Replace the Toner cartridge
• Replace the High Voltage Unit.
• Clean the LED print head.
Defective Drum
• Replace the Drum Cartridge.
Poor image transfer
• Replace the Image Transfer Unit.
• Replace the High Voltage Unit.
• Replace the Main Control PCB
4.12.4 Printout too dark
Symptom: Printed image is faint or does not print solid.
Poor development
drum cartridge or toner cartridge may be not installed correctly. Install each
ABCDE
ABCDE • The
cartridge correctly.
ABCDE
ABCDE • Replace the Toner cartridge
the High Voltage Unit.
ABCDE
ABCDE •• Replace
Clean the LED print head.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE Defective Drum
• Replace the Drum Cartridge.
Poor image transfer
• Replace the Image Transfer Unit.
• Replace the High Voltage Unit.
• Replace the Main Control PCB.
4-21
4.12.5 Blurred background
Symptom: Copies show a gray or dark background.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Poor development
• Replace the High Voltage Unit.
• Replace the Main Control PCB.
• Replace the Toner Cartridge.
• Replace the Drum Cartridge.
4.12.6 Uneven print density
Symptom: Image graduates from dark to light across page.
A B CDE
A B CDE
A B CDE
A B CDE
A B CDE
Poor development
• The drum cartridge or toner cartridge may be not installed correctly. Install
each cartridge correctly.
• Replace the Toner cartridge
• Replace the High Voltage Unit.
• Clean the LED print head.
Defective Drum
• If the drum surface for moisture condensation found, leave drum in unit with
power on to dry.
• Replace the Drum Cartridge.
Poor image transfer
• Replace the Image Transfer Unit.
• Replace the High Voltage Unit.
• Replace the Main Control PCB.
4-22
4.12.7 Irregularities
Symptom: Portions of image are broken or missing.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Poor image transfer
• Replace the Image Transfer Unit.
• Replace the High Voltage Unit.
4.12.8 White (Black) Line
Symptom: White or black strip appears vertically through image.
Poor development
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
• Replace the Toner Cartridge.
Defective Drum
• Replace the Drum Cartridge.
Improper charging
• Clean the Charge Wire.
• Replace the Drum Cartridge.
Improper fusing
• Replace the Fusing Unit.
Poor image transfer
• Replace the Image Transfer Unit.
Improper LED exposure
• Replace the LED Print Head Unit.
Poor scanning
• Clean the ADF glass.
4.12.9 Toner Smudges
Symptom: Background appears “peppered” with black spots.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Poor scanning
• Clean the ADF glass.
Improper fusing
• Clean the Fusing Rollers. If it is not effective, replace Rollers or the Fusing
Unit.
Improper cleaning
• Replace the Drum Unit.
4-23
4.13 LCD Failure
Symptom: No display in the LCD.
Suggested corrective action:
1. Verify that the power cord is correctly connected and the power switch is ON.
2. Check for a blown fuse or open circuit on the unit’s internal power supply.
3. Check the DC output voltages from the power supply unit to connector P3 on the main control PCB.
If any of the following voltages are incorrect, replace the power supply.
•Pin 4, 5
: +5 V
•Pin 8, 9
: +3.3 V
•Pin 6, 7, 10, 11, 14, 15 : GND
4. Check the following connectors:
• LCD assembly to the Panel PCB (P52)
• Panel PCB (P50) to the Harness to the main control PCB (P5)
5. Replace the associated PCBs and connector harness.
4.14 General Power Failure
Symptom: Unit will not power up.
Suggested corrective action:
1. Verify that the power cord is correctly connected and the power switch is ON.
2. Verify that the electrical outlet is on.
3. Check for a blown fuse or open circuit on the unit’s internal power supply.
4. Check the DC output voltages from the power supply unit to connector P3 on the main control PCB.
If any of the following voltages are incorrect, replace the power supply.
• Pin 4, 5
: +5 V
• Pin 8, 9
: +3.3 V
• Pin 6, 7, 10, 11, 14, 15 : GND
• Pin 12, 13
: +24 V@Pin 1:5 V
• Pin 12, 13
: +17 V@Pin 1:0 V
4-24
5 Maintenance & Adjustment
5.1 Maintenance schedule...................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2 Re/Disassemble................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.2.1 COVERS.................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.2.2 PCBS........................................................................................................................ 5-15
5.2.3 SCANNING SECTION............................................................................................. 5-25
5.2.4 PRINTER SECTION................................................................................................. 5-43
5.3 Adjustment...................................................................................................................... 5-70
5.3.1 Outline of printer registration adjustment................................................................. 5-70
5.3.2 Printer registration mode.......................................................................................... 5-70
5.3.3 Registration adjustment............................................................................................ 5-73
5.3.4 Zoom adjustment...................................................................................................... 5-77
5.3.5 SEPARATION PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT............................................................ 5-81
5.3.6 CLEANING THE MIRRORS A, B AND C................................................................. 5-82
5-1
5.1 Maintenance schedule
 Scanning Section
Parts Name
Roller Separator*1
Pad Separator*1
Contact glass & Pane*2
Sheet document press
(White sheet) *2
Exposure Lamp*2
Roller Feed
Roller Exit
Maintenance Cycle (pages)
Clean
Replace
60,000 or

2 years
60,000 or

2 years
Clean when
dirty
Clean when
dirty
Reference Page
1
5-25
1
5-37
1
1
10,000 hours
100,000
100,000


QTY
1
1
1
5-19
5-26
5-28
*1 Replace these parts at the same time.
*2 It is not a maintenance parts. However, please replace when it becomes not works.
 Printer Section
Parts Name
Roller Transfer
Roller Register
ASSY FUSER
Roller Exit
Roller Pickup MP
Maintenance Cycle (pages)
Clean
Replace
60,000

100,000
100,000

100,000
60,000 or

2 years
PAD Pressure MP

Roller Pickup CST

PAD Pressure CST

Roller Feed Duplex
(Duplex models only)

60,000 or
2 years
60,000 or
2 years
60,000 or
2 years
60,000 or
2 years
QTY
Reference Page
1
1
1
1
5-48
5-49
5-53
5-54
1
5-52
1
5-52
1
5-55
1
5-55
2
5-62
QTY
Reference Page
 Developing Section
Parts Name
MFX-2050/1450 Drum cartridge
F-565/525 Drum cartridge
MFX-2050/1450 Toner cartridge
F-565/525 Toner cartridge
Drum charge wire and LED print
head
Maintenance Cycle (pages)
Clean
Replace
30,000
20,000
16,000
14,000
1
1
1
See Operating
Instructions
1

Note:“” means to clean the mechanism when a paper take-up or transport failure or print quality
problems occurs.
5-2
5.2 Re/Disassemble
Before disassembling, disconnect the power cord and line cord.
5.2.1 COVERS.................................................................................................................... 5-5
TRAY DOCUMENT......................................................................................................... 5-6
COVER CONNECT......................................................................................................... 5-6
COVER PLATEN (MFX-2050/1450 only)........................................................................ 5-7
COVER ADF BASE (F-565/525 only)............................................................................. 5-7
COVER TX SIDE B (MFX-2050/1450)............................................................................ 5-8
COVER TX SIDE B (F-565/525)..................................................................................... 5-9
COVER TX SIDE F (MFX-2050/1450).......................................................................... 5-10
COVER TX SIDE F (F-565/525)................................................................................... 5-11
COVER FRONT............................................................................................................ 5-12
TRAY EXIT PAPER...................................................................................................... 5-12
COVER PANEL NGP (MFX-2050/1450)....................................................................... 5-13
COVER PANEL NGP (F-565/525)................................................................................ 5-13
TRAY A MP/PAD FLAPPER MP................................................................................... 5-14
5.2.2 PCBS........................................................................................................................ 5-15
PCB PANEL 1............................................................................................................... 5-16
PCB PANEL 2............................................................................................................... 5-16
PCB INVERTER (MFX-2050/1450).............................................................................. 5-17
PCB INVERTER (F-565/525)........................................................................................ 5-18
LAMP (MFX-2050/1450)............................................................................................... 5-19
LAMP (F-565/525)......................................................................................................... 5-19
PCB NGP...................................................................................................................... 5-20
PCB MAIN..................................................................................................................... 5-21
PCB CONNECT B......................................................................................................... 5-22
PCB CONNECT A / POWER-SUPPLY......................................................................... 5-22
PCB PSU / PCB NCU................................................................................................... 5-23
PCB CONNECT C........................................................................................................ 5-24
5.2.3 SCANNING SECTION............................................................................................. 5-25
ROLLER SEPARATOR................................................................................................. 5-25
ROLLER FEED............................................................................................................. 5-26
ROLLER EXIT............................................................................................................... 5-28
FRAME SCANNER (MFX-2050/1450).......................................................................... 5-29
FRAME SCANNER (F-565/525)................................................................................... 5-30
HOME SENSOR (HS) (MFX-2050/1450 only).............................................................. 5-32
CHASSIS FBS.............................................................................................................. 5-33
ADF MOTOR................................................................................................................. 5-34
MICRO SW-ASSY ADF................................................................................................ 5-35
GUIDE INNER A........................................................................................................... 5-36
GUIDE OUTER............................................................................................................. 5-36
PAD SEPARATOR........................................................................................................ 5-37
ADF DRIVE GEARS..................................................................................................... 5-38
ADF PERMIT SENSOR (APS)...................................................................................... 5-39
5-3
SENSOR DS1/DS2....................................................................................................... 5-40
FBS MOTOR (MFX-2050/1450 only)............................................................................ 5-41
ASSEMBLING THE FBS MOTOR (MFX-2050/1450 only)........................................... 5-42
5.2.4 PRINTER SECTION................................................................................................. 5-43
SOLENOID.................................................................................................................... 5-43
CLUTCH (MG).............................................................................................................. 5-43
RX MOTOR................................................................................................................... 5-44
MOTOR DUPLEX......................................................................................................... 5-44
SPRING CLUTCH......................................................................................................... 5-45
FRAME DRIVE GEARS................................................................................................ 5-46
ROLLER TRANSFER................................................................................................... 5-48
ROLLER REGISTER.................................................................................................... 5-49
SENSOR TRAYS.......................................................................................................... 5-50
SENSOR JAMC1.......................................................................................................... 5-51
COVER SWITCH.......................................................................................................... 5-51
SENSOR PSS............................................................................................................... 5-52
ROLLER PICKUP MP / PAD PRESSURE MP............................................................. 5-52
ASSY FUSER............................................................................................................... 5-53
SENSOR PDS / DPS.................................................................................................... 5-54
ROLLER EXIT............................................................................................................... 5-54
ROLLER PICK UP (1st CST) / (2nd CST).................................................................... 5-55
PAD PRESSURE (1st CST) / (2nd CST)...................................................................... 5-55
PIECE COVER CST (1st CST Paper dust)................................................................... 5-56
SENSOR JAMC2.......................................................................................................... 5-56
SENSOR PES2............................................................................................................. 5-57
ROLLER FEED 2ND (2nd CST)................................................................................... 5-57
PLATE FRAME B (2nd CST)........................................................................................ 5-58
PLATE FRAME B GEARS (2nd CST)........................................................................... 5-59
SPRING CLUTCH (2nd CST)....................................................................................... 5-60
SOLENOID (2nd CST).................................................................................................. 5-60
SENSOR OPEN2.......................................................................................................... 5-61
ROLLER FEED DUPLEX.............................................................................................. 5-62
TONER SENSOR 1, 2 (TS1, TS2)................................................................................ 5-64
SENSOR PES1............................................................................................................. 5-67
SENSOR OPEN1.......................................................................................................... 5-68
LED............................................................................................................................... 5-69
5-4
5.2.1 COVERS
Cover platen (page 5-7)
Cover top (page 5-13)
Cover contact
Cover panel NGP (page 5-13)
(page 5-17)
Cover ADF base (page 5-7)
Cover LENS (page 5-19)
Cover option
(page 5-21)
Cover TOP PPF
Cover front (page 5-12)
Cover left (page 5-23)
Tray exit paper (page 5-12)
Cover TX side F (page 5-10)
Tray document (page 5-6)
Guide outer
Cover TX side B (page 5-8)
Cover jam access
Cover connect (page 5-6)
Tray A MP (page 5-14)
Cover shield (page 5-21)
Cover back (page 5-33)
5-5
(page 5-13)
TRAY DOCUMENT
1) Release the locking tab from the Cover platen.
2) Remove the TRAY DOCUMENT.
Tray document
COVER CONNECT
1) Remove the Cover connect mounting screw.
2) Disconnect the connector on the PCB CONNECT A.
3) Remove the COVER CONNECT.
Note: When reattaching the Cover connect, be careful not to get the harness caught on the Cover shield.
PCB CONNECT A
5-6
Cover CONNECT
COVER PLATEN (MFX-2050/1450 only)
1) Remove the Cover connect. (See page 5-6)
2) Open the Cover platen.
3) Remove the Ground wire, and then raise the Cover platen.
4) Release the locking tab, and then remove the COVER PLATEN.
Cover platen
Tab
Ground
wire
Platen hinge
COVER ADF BASE (F-565/525 only)
1) Remove the Cover connect. (See page 5-6)
2) Open the Cover ADF base.
3) Remove the Ground wire, and then remove two Hinge mounting screws.
4) Remove the COVER ADF BASE.
Cover ADF base
Ground
wire
Hinge
5-7
COVER TX SIDE B (MFX-2050/1450)
1) Open the Cover platen.
2) Remove the Cover TX side B mounting screw.
3) Close the Cover platen.
4) Open the Guide outer.
5) Release two locking tabs, and then remove the COVER TX SIDE B.
Cover TX side B
Guide outer
5-8
COVER TX SIDE B (F-565/525)
1) Open the Cover ADF base.
2) Remove the Cover TX side B mounting screw.
3) Close the Cover ADF base.
4) Open the Guide outer.
5) Release two locking tabs, and then remove the COVER TX SIDE B.
Cover TX side B
Guide outer
5-9
COVER TX SIDE F (MFX-2050/1450)
1) Open the Cover platen.
2) Remove the Cover TX side F mounting screw.
3) Close the Cover platen.
4) Open the Guide outer.
5) Release the locking tab, and then remove the COVER TX SIDE F.
Cover Tx side F
Guide outer
5-10
COVER TX SIDE F (F-565/525)
1) Open the Cover ADF base.
2) Remove the Cover TX side F mounting screw.
3) Close the Cover ADF base.
4) Open the Guide outer.
5) Release the locking tab, and then remove the COVER TX SIDE F.
Guide outer
Cover Tx side F
Tab
5-11
COVER FRONT
1) Open the Cover front.
2) Release two locking tabs, and then remove the COVER FRONT.
Cover front
TRAY EXIT PAPER
1) Remove the Chassis FBS. (See page 5-33)
2) Remove the Cover left.
3) Open the Cover front.
4) Remove three Tray exit paper mounting screws, and then remove the TRAY EXIT PAPER.
Tray exit paper
Cover front
5-12
COVER PANEL NGP (MFX-2050/1450)
1) Remove the Cover platen. (See page 5-7)
2) Remove five Cover top mounting screws, and then removes the Cover top.
3) Remove three Cover panel NGP mounting screws, then release three locking tabs, and then remove
the COVER PANEL NGP.
Cover top
Cover panel NGP
COVER PANEL NGP (F-565/525)
1) Remove the Cover ADF base. (See page 5-7)
2) Remove five Cover top PPF mounting screws, and then remove the Cover top PPF.
3) Remove three Cover panel NGP mounting screws, then release three locking tabs, and then remove
the COVER PANEL NGP.
Cover top PPF
Cover panel NGP
5-13
TRAY A MP/PAD FLAPPER MP
1) Open the Tray A MP.
2) Release two locking tabs, and then remove the TRAY A MP.
Tray A MP
3) Peel off the PAD FLAPPER MP.
Pad flapper MP
5-14
5.2.2 PCBS
PCB PANEL 1 (See page 5-16)
PCB CCD (See page 5-29)
PCB INVERTER (See page 5-17)
PCB NCL (See page 5-23)
PCB PANEL 2 (See page 5-16)
PCB DC/DC
PCB CONNECT C (See page 5-24)
PCB PSU (See page 5-23)
PCB CONNECT A (See page 5-22)
PCB MAIN (See page 5-21)
PCB NGP (See page 5-20)
POWER-SUPPLY (See page 5-22)
5-15
PCB CONNECT B (See page 5-22)
PCB PANEL 1
1) Remove the Cover platen (MFX-2050/1450) or Cover ADF base (F-565/525). (See page 5-7)
2) Remove the Cover panel NGP. (See page 5-13)
3) Remove eight PCB PANEL 1 mounting screws, then release six locking tabs.
4) Disconnect the connector on the PCB PANEL 2.
5) Disconnect the Film harness of the LCD, and then remove the PCB PANEL1.
Note: After removing the PCB PANEL 1, do not turn over the Cover pane NGP. Otherwise the Pin sensor may fall off.
PCB PANEL 1
Cover panel NGP
Film harness
PCB PANEL 2
PCB PANEL 2
1) Remove the Cover platen (MFX-2050/1450) or Cover ADF base (F-565/525). (See page 5-7)
2) Remove the Cover panel NGP. (See page 5-13)
3) Disconnect the connector on the PCB PANEL 2.
4) Remove three PCB PANEL 2 mounting screw, and then remove the PCB PANEL 2.
Cover NGP panel
PCB PANEL 2
5-16
PCB INVERTER (MFX-2050/1450)
1) Open the Cover platen.
2) Remove two Cover contact mounting screws, then release three locking tabs, and then remove the
Cover contact.
3) Remove two Cover lens locking snap fits, and four locking tabs, and then remove the Cover lens.
Cover contact
Cover lens
Snap fit
4) Remove the PCB INVERTER mounting screw, then disconnect two connectors and two locking tabs,
and then the PCB INVERTER.
PCB INVERTER
CN1
CN2
5-17
PCB INVERTER (F-565/525)
1) Remove the Cover ADF base. (See page 5-7)
2) Remove the Cover top PPF. (See page 5-13)
3) Remove the Cover lens. (See page 5-19)
4) Remove the PCB INVERTER mounting screw, then disconnect two connectors and two locking tabs,
and then the PCB INVERTER.
PCB INVERTER
CN1
CN2
5-18
LAMP (MFX-2050/1450)
1) Remove the Cover contact. (See page 5-17)
2) Remove the Cover lens. (See page 5-17)
3) Lift the front of the Frame scanner.
4) Disconnect the connector for the Lamp on the PCB INVERTER.
5) Release two locking tabs and two snap fits, and then remove the LAMP.
Lamp
Case lamp
Snap fit
Frame scanner
CN2
LAMP (F-565/525)
1) Remove the Cover ADF base. (See page 5-7)
2) Remove the Cover top PPF. (See page 5-13)
3) Remove the Cover lens.
4) Lift the front of the Frame scanner.
5) Disconnect the connector for the Lamp on the PCB INVERTER.
6) Release two locking tabs and two snap fits, and then remove the LAMP.
5-19
PCB NGP
When replacing the PCB NGP, first make a backup of your network setting. See page 3-139, “3.24.2
Export / Import the network setting” for detail. (Attach a compact flash memory card on the PCB NGP.
Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <4>, [Export Server Data] and then [Enter].)
1) Remove the Cover connect and disconnect the connector. (See page 5-6)
2) Remove two Cover option mounting screw, and then remove the Cover option. (See page 5-21)
3) Remove four Cover shield mounting screw, and then remove the Cover shield. (See page 5-21)
4) Disconnect the connector on the PCB NGP.
5) Remove four PCB NGP mounting screws as shown below.
6) Release the Spacer, and then PCB NGP.
After the PCB NGP is replaced, reinstall the network setting. See page 3-139, “3.24.2 Export / Import
the network setting” for detail. (Attach the compact flash memory card on the PCB NGP. Press
<Setting>, <*>, <2>, <4>, [Import Server Data] and then [Enter].)
Spacer
Network PCB
5-20
PCB MAIN
1) Remove the Cover connect and disconnect the connector. (See page 5-6)
2) Remove two Cover option mounting screw, and then remove the Cover option.
3) Remove four Cover shield mounting screw, and then remove the Cover shield.
4) Disconnect the connector on the PCB NGP. (See page 5-20)
5) Remove four PCB NGP mounting screws as shown below. (See page 5-20)
6) Remove the Plate main B mounting screws, and then remove the Plate main B.
Cover option
Cover shield
Plate main B
7) Release the Spacer, and then PCB NGP. (See page 5-20)
8) Disconnect all connectors on the PCB MAIN.
9) Remove six PCB MAIN mounting screws, and then remove PCB MAIN.
CCD PANEL NCU
P5
P8C
PCB MAIN
P19
P8C
P3 PSU
P91
P92
Note: The DRAM back-up battery is connected to the PCB MAIN. When the PCB MAIN and PCB Connect B are
disconnected, the back-up will be lost.
Note: Turning parameters for Color(R,G,B) and Gray mode are stored in the EEPROM(IC42). When the PCB MAIN is
replaced, the EEPROM on malfunction PCB should be replaced to the new PCB.
5-21
PCB CONNECT B
1) Remove the PCB MAIN. (See page 5-21)
2) Separate the PCB CONNECT B.
PCB MAIN
PCB CONNECT B
PCB CONNECT A / POWER-SUPPLY
1) Remove PCB NGP. (See page 5-20)
2) Remove the PCB MAIN. (See page 5-21)
3) Disconnect seven connectors on the PCB CONNECT A.
4) Remove four PCB CONNECT A mounting screws, and then remove the PCB CONNECT A.
5) Disconnect seven connectors on the POWER-SUPPLY.
6) Remove three POWER-SUPPLY mounting screw, and then remove the POWER-SUPPLY.
PCB CONNECT A
POWER-SUPPLY
5-22
PCB PSU / PCB NCU
1) Remove the Cover option. (See page 5-21)
2) Open the Cover front.
3) Remove the Cover left mounting screw, and then remove the Cover left.
Cover front
Cover left
4) Remove four PCB NCU mounting screws.
5) Disconnect the connector and then remove the PCB NCU.
6) Disconnect two connectors.
7) Remove the harness from cord clamp.
8) Remove the PCB PSU.
Clamp
PCB NCU
PCB PSU
5-23
PCB CONNECT C
1) Remove the Chassis FBS. (See page 5-33)
2) Remove the Tray exit paper. (See page 5-12)
3) Disconnect the connector and the Film harness.
4) Remove two PCB CONNECT C mounting screws, and then remove the PCB CONNECT C.
PCB CONNECT C
5-24
5.2.3 SCANNING SECTION
ROLLER SEPARATOR
1) Remove the Cover TX side B. (See page 5-8)
2) Remove one plastic ring.
3) Slide the bearing as shown below.
4) Remove the Gear 40 0.6B.
5) Remove the Shaft separator and then remove the ROLLER SEPARATOR.
Note: When removing the Roller separator, be careful not to lose the plastic ring.
ASSY SHAFT S
Gear 40 0.6B
Bearing
5-25
ROLLER FEED
1) Remove the Guide inner A. (See page 5-36)
2) Remove three Spring P earth mounting screws, and then remove the Spring P earth.
3) Open the Guide inner B.
Guide inner A
Guide outer
Guide inner B
Ground wire
Spring P earth
4) Remove two E-rings and then remove the Gear 27 0.5 and two bearings.
E-ring
Gear 27 0.5
Guide inner A
E-ring
5-26
5) Lift the Roller feed and slide out as shown below.
Then remove the ROLLER FEED.
Roller feed
Roller feed
5-27
ROLLER EXIT
1) Remove the Guide inner A. (See page 5-36)
2) Remove the Spring P earth. (See page 5-26)
3) Open the Guide inner B.
4) Remove two E-rings and then remove the Gear 27 0.5 ONE WAY and one bearing.
E-ring Gear 27 0.5 ONE WAY
Roller exit
Guide inner B
E-ring
5) Slide out the ROLLER EXIT.
Roller exit
5-28
FRAME SCANNER (MFX-2050/1450)
1) Remove Cover platen. (See page 5-7)
2) Remove the Cover top. (See page 5-13)
3) Remove the Cover lens. (See page 5-17)
4) Disconnect the Flat harness from the connector P1 on the PCB CCD.
5) Release two locking tabs, and then remove the Core.
Flat harness
Core
P2
P1
Frame scanner
PCB CCD
6) Disconnect the Flat harness on the Frame scanner.
7) Remove the belt from the Frame scanner.
Shaft guide
Belt
Belt
Frame scanner
Flat harness
5-29
8) Slide out the Shaft guide as shown below. Then remove the FRAME SCANNER.
Shaft guide
Frame scanner
FRAME SCANNER (F-565/525)
1) Remove the Cover ADF base. (See page 5-7)
2) Remove the Cover top PPF. (See page 5-13)
3) Remove the Cover lens. (See page 5-19)
4) Disconnect the Flat harness from the connector P1 on the PCB CCD.
5) Release two locking tabs, and then remove the Core.
5-30
6) Lift the front of the Frame scanner, and then disconnect the Flat harness on the Frame scanner.
7) Remove two Bracket scanner B mounting screws, and then remove the Bracket scanner B.
8) Slide out the Bracket scanner B as shown below. Then remove the FRAME SCANNER.
Bracket scanner B
Frame scanner
5-31
HOME SENSOR (HS) (MFX-2050/1450 only)
1) Remove the Cover platen. (See page 5-7)
2) Remove the Cover top. (See page 5-13)
3) Remove the Frame scanner. (See page 5-29)
4) Remove the Sensor stopper.
5) Remove the tab, and then remove the HOME SENSOR.
Sensor stopper
P2
Home sensor
5-32
CHASSIS FBS
1) Remove the Cover connect. (See page 5-6)
2) Remove the Cover option. (See page 5-21)
3) Remove the Cover shield. (See page 5-21)
4) Remove two Cover back mounting screws, and then remove Cover back.
5) Open the Cover jam access.
6) Disconnect three connectors and remove the Ground wire.
7) Remove seven Chassis FBS mounting screws, and then remove the CHASSIS FBS.
Cover platen
Chassis FBS
Ground wire
Cover jam access
Cover back
5-33
ADF MOTOR
1) Remove the Cover TX side B. (See page 5-8, 5-9)
2) Cut the Cable tie.
3) Disconnect the connector.
4) Remove the three Bracket motor ADF mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket motor ADF.
ADF motor
Bracket motor ADF
Cable tie
5) Remove two ADF motor mounting screw, and then remove the ADF MOTOR.
ADF motor
Bracket motor ADF
5-34
MICRO SW-ASSY ADF
1) Remove the cover TX side B. (See page 5-8, 5-9)
2) Remove the bracket motor ADF. (See page 5-34)
3) Remove the Gear 18/55 and the Gear 24/47.
MICRO SW-ASSY ADF
Gear 24/47
Gear 18/55
4) Cut the Cable tie.
5) Disconnect the connector and remove the MICRO SW-ASSY ADF.
MICRO SW-ASSY ADF
Cable tie
5-35
GUIDE INNER A
1) Remove the Cover TX side F. (See page 5-10, 5-11)
2) Remove the Cover TX side B. (See page 5-8, 5-9)
3) Remove the Ground wire as shown below.
4) Remove two APS bracket mounting screw and then remove the APS bracket.
5) Remove two Guide inner A mounting screw and the tab, and then remove the GUIDE INNER A.
Ground wire
Guide inner A
APS bracket
GUIDE OUTER
1) Remove the Cover TX side F. (See page 5-10, 5-11)
2) Remove the Cover TX side B. (See page 5-8, 5-9)
3) Remove the Guide inner A.
4) Remove the GUIDE OUTER.
Guide inner A
Guide outer
5-36
PAD SEPARATOR
1) Remove the Cover TX side B. (See page 5-8, 5-9)
2) Remove the Roller separator. (See page 5-25)
3) Release two locking tabs, and then remove the Cover separator.
4) Remove the PAD SEPARATOR.
Pad separator
Cover separator
5-37
ADF DRIVE GEARS
1) Remove the Cover TX side F. (See page 5-10, 5-11)
2) Remove the Cover TX side B. (See page 5-8, 5-9)
3) Remove the Bracket motor ADF. (See page 5-34)
4) Remove the APS bracket. (See page 5-39)
5) Remove the Guide inner A. (See page 5-36)
6) [1] Remove the Gear 24/47.
7) [2] Remove the Gear 18/55.
8) [3] Remove the Gear 40 0.6B.
9) [4] Remove two Gear 59 0.5.
10) Remove one E-ring, and then remove [5] the Gear 27 0.5.
11) Remove one E-ring, and then remove [6] the Gear 27 0.5 ONEWAY.
[3] Gear 40 0.6B
[6] Gear 27 0.5 ONEWAY
ANA03
[4] Gear 59 0.5
[1] Gear 24/47
ANA04
[4] Gear 59 0.5
[5] Gear 27 0.5
[2] Gear 18/55
5-38
ADF PERMIT SENSOR (APS)
1) Remove the Cover TX side F. (See pages 5-10, 5-11)
2) Remove the Cover TX side B. (See pages 5-8, 5-9)
3) Remove the Bracket motor ADF mounting screw. (See page 5-34)
4) Remove two APS bracket mounting screws, and then remove the APS bracket.
5) Remove the Guide inner A. (See page 5-36)
6) Disconnect the connector on the APS and remove the SENSOR (APS).
Guide inner A
APS
APS bracket
5-39
SENSOR DS1/DS2
1) Remove the Guide inner A. (See page 5-36)
2) Loosen the Guide inner B mounting screw (A) and open the Guide inner B.
3) Remove the DS1 mounting screw and disconnect the connector on the DS1, then remove the DS1.
4) Remove the DS2 mounting screw and disconnect the connector on the DS2, then remove the DS2.
Note: When reattaching the parts, close the Guide inner B first and then tighten up the mounting screw (A).
DS2
DS1
(A)
Guide inner B
5-40
FBS MOTOR (MFX-2050/1450 only)
1) Remove the Cover platen. (See page 5-7)
2) Remove the Cover top. (See page 5-13)
3) Remove three Bracket motor FBS mounting screws.
4) Remove the Shaft guide, and then remove the spring C FG.
5) Slide the Bracket motor FBS, and then remove the belt.
Bracket motor FBS
Spring C FG
Shaft guide
Belt
6) Remove the Spring C tension, and then remove the Bracket motor FBS.
Bracket motor FBS
Spring C Tension
7) Remove two FBS motor mounting screw and disconnect the harness, and then remove the FBS MOTOR.
FBS Motor
P83
5-41
ASSEMBLING THE FBS MOTOR (MFX-2050/1450 only)
1) Temporarily tighten the three Bracket motor FBS screws.
2) Attach the belt in position.
3) Tighten up the above three screws.
FBS motor
Belt
5-42
5.2.4 PRINTER SECTION
SOLENOID
1) Remove the Cover option. (See page 5-21)
2) Remove the Cover shield. (See page 5-21)
3) Remove the Cover back. (See page 5-33)
4) Remove the Bracket solenoid mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket solenoid.
5) Cut the Cable tie, and disconnect the connector.
6) Remove the Solenoid mounting screw, and then remove the SOLENOID.
Solenoid
Bracket solenoid
Cable tie
CLUTCH (MG)
1) Remove the Cover option. (See page 5-21)
2) Remove the Cover shield. (See page 5-21)
3) Remove the Cover back. (See page 5-33)
4) Remove two plastic rings.
5) Disconnect the connector of Clutch (MG), and then remove the CLUTCH (MG).
Clutch(MG)
Clutch(MG)
5-43
RX MOTOR
1) Remove the Cover option. (See page 5-21)
2) Remove the Cover shield. (See page 5-21)
3) Remove the Cover back. (See page 5-33)
4) Remove four RX motor mounting screws and disconnect the connector, and then remove the RX MOTOR.
RX motor
MOTOR DUPLEX
1) Remove the Cover option. (See page 5-21)
2) Remove the Cover shield. (See page 5-21)
3) Remove the Cover back. (See page 5-33)
4) Remove two Motor duplex mounting screws and disconnect the connector, and then remove the MOTOR
DUPLEX.
Motor duplex
5-44
SPRING CLUTCH
1) Remove the Cover option. (See page 5-21)
2) Remove the Cover shield. (See page 5-21)
3) Remove the Cover back. (See page 5-33)
4) Remove two Ground wire mounting screw, and then remove the Ground wire.
5) Remove three Stay pickup mounting screw, and then remove the stay pickup.
6) Remove the SPRING CLUTCH.
Stay pickup
Spring clutch
Ground wire
Ground wire
5-45
FRAME DRIVE GEARS
1) Remove the Cover option. (See page 5-21)
2) Remove the Cover shield. (See page 5-21)
3) Remove the Cover back. (See page 5-33)
4) Remove three Ground wires.
5) Remove five Frame drive mounting screws, and then pull out the Frame drive.
6) Remove the harness from two clamps, and disconnect the connector on RX motor.
7) Remove the FRAME DRIVE.
Clamp
Frame drive
Ground wire
Ground wire
8) [1] Remove the Gear 73H/27H.
9) [2] Remove the Gear 54H/28H.
10) [3] Remove the Gear 61H.
Frame drive
[1] Gear 73H/23H
[3] Gear 61H
[2] Gear 54H/28H
5-46
11) Remove the Spring clutch. (See page 5-45)
12) Remove the Clutch (MG). (See page 5-43)
13) Remove the Motor duplex.
14) [4] Remove the Gear 59H/19.
15) [5] Remove the Gear 35/19.
16) [6] Remove the Gear 20.
17) [7] Remove the Gear 21.
18) [8] Remove the Gear 34 0.8.
19) [9] Remove the Gear 34 (D88-30160-61).
20) [10] Remove the Gear 41/21.
21) [11] Remove the Gear 33H/37.
22) [12] Remove the Gear 22.
23) [13] Remove the Gear 57H/27H.
[6] Gear 20
[7] Gear 21
[5] Gear 35/19
[4] Gear 59H/19
[13] Gear 57H/27H
[12] Gear 22
[11] Gear 33H/37
[9] Gear 34
[8] Gear 34 0.8
[10] Gear 41/21
5-47
ROLLER TRANSFER
1) Open the Cover jam access.
2) Remove the Knob lock JAC.
3) Remove four Guide inner mounting screws, and then remove the Guide inner.
4) Disconnect the connector of PCB ERS lamp.
Knob lock JAC
Guide inner
PCB ERS lamp
Cover jam access
5) Remove two Guide paper transfer A mounting screws, and then the Cover bracket transfer and Guide
paper transfer A.
Cover bracket transfer
Guide paper transfer A
Sheet transfer
5-48
6) Remove the two Bracket transfer tabs from the back of the Guide inner.
7) Remove the ROLLER TRANSFER.
Bracket transfer
Roller transfer
ANA05
Bracket transfer
ROLLER REGISTER
1) Open the Cover jam access.
2) Remove the Knob lock JAC. (See page 5-48)
3) Remove the Guide inner. (See page 5-48)
4) Remove two E-rings, and then remove the Gear 16H-0.8.
5) Hold the Bearing press’s, and slide and remove the ROLLER REGISTER.
Bearing press
ANB03
4)
ANB03
4)
Bearing
Roller register
Bearing press
Gear 16H-0.8
5-49
Bearing press
Gear 16H-0.8
SENSOR TRAYS
1) Remove the Cover jam access.
2) Separate the Chassis cassette 2nd from the body, and remove the Sensor stopper from behind.
3) Remove the Sensor TRAYS while pulling up the Feeler MP.
Feeler MP
TRAYS
Sensor stopper
Chassis cassette 2nd
5-50
SENSOR JAMC1
1) Remove the Cover option. (See page 5-21)
2) Remove the Cover shield. (See page 5-21)
3) Remove the Cover back. (See page 5-33)
4) Open the Cover jam access.
5) Release the tab, and then remove the Sensor JAMC1.
JAMC1
Sensor stopper
COVER SWITCH
1) Remove the Chassis FBS. (See page 5-33)
2) Open the Cover jam access.
3) Remove five Frame upper mounting screws, and then remove the Frame upper.
4) Disconnect the connector of Sensor interlock, and then remove the Cover Switch.
Ground wire
Ground wire
Frame upper
Cover Switch
5-51
SENSOR PSS
1) Remove the Cover jam access.
2) Remove the Guide press B mounting screw, and then remove Guide press B while pulling up the
Feeler PSS.
3) Release the tab, and then remove the SENSOR PSS.
Feeler PSS
Guide press B
Sensor stopper
Sensor PSS
ROLLER PICKUP MP / PAD PRESSURE MP
1) Remove the Clutch (MG) (See page 5-43)
2) Remove the Cover jam access.
3) Remove two E-rings.
4) Lift the Guide paper MPDUP and press down the MP pressure.
5) Slide the ROLLER PICKUP MP to the left and remove.
Guide paper MPDUP
Clutch(MG)
E-ring
E-ring
MP pressure
Roller pickup MP
5-52
6) Remove the PAD PRESSURE MP.
Note: When reattaching the Pad pressure MP, align the notch with the counterpart on the body.
Pad pressure MP
Guide paper MPDUP
ASSY FUSER
1) Open the Cover jam access.
2) Remove the Ground wire and four Printer fuser mounting screws, and then remove the harness.
3) Remove the ASSY FUSER.
ASSY FUSER
Ground wire
5-53
SENSOR PDS / DPS
1) Remove the Chassis FBS. (See page 5-33)
2) Remove five Frame upper mounting screws, and then remove the Frame upper.
3) Remove the Sensor stopper and disconnect the connector, and then remove the SENSOR PDS/DPS.
Ground wire
Sensor DPS
Frame upper
Ground wire
Sensor PDS
Sensor stopper
Sensor stopper
ROLLER EXIT
1) Remove the Chassis FBS. (See page 5-33)
2) Remove the Frame upper.
3) Remove one E-ring, and then remove the BRG exit.
4) Slide out the ROLLER EXIT.
Note: When reattaching the BRG exit, align its cutout with the cutout of the Frame upper’s holder.
Frame upper
BRG Exit
TX gear 20
E-ring
Roller exit
BRG Exit
5-54
ROLLER PICK UP (1st CST) / (2nd CST)
1) Pull out the Cassette 1st.
2) Remove one plastic ring and bearing.
3) Release the roller tab from the shaft groove, and remove the ROLLER PICK UP.
Roller pick up
E-ring
Cassette 1st
PAD PRESSURE (1st CST) / (2nd CST)
1) Remove the Roller pick up.
2) Remove the PAD PRESSURE.
Pad pressure
5-55
PIECE COVER CST (1st CST Paper dust)
1) Pull out the Cassette 1st.
2) Remove two Piece cover CST mounting screws, and then remove the PIECE COVER CST.
Note: Paper dust is collected in the Piece cover CST. When it is full, empty it.
Cassette 1st
Piece cover CST
SENSOR JAMC2
1) Separate the Chassis 2nd from the Main frame.
2) Open the Cover JAC 2nd.
3) Remove the Sensor stopper and disconnect the connector, and then remove the Sensor JAMC2.
Sensor stopper
Chassis cassette 2nd
JAMC2
Cover JAC 2nd
5-56
SENSOR PES2
1) Separate the Chassis cassette 2nd from the Main frame.
2) Pull out the Cassette 2nd.
3) Turn over the Chassis cassette 2nd.
4) Remove the Bracket sensor mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket sensor.
5) Remove the Sensor stopper and connector, and then remove the Sensor PES2.
Chassis cassette 2nd
PES2
Bracket sensor
Cassette 2nd
Sensor stopper
ROLLER FEED 2ND (2nd CST)
1) Separate the Chassis cassette 2nd from the Main frame.
2) Remove two Guide paper 2nd CST mounting screws, and then remove the Guide paper 2nd CST.
3) Remove the Plate frame F mounting screw, and then remove the Plate frame F.
4) Remove the ROLLER FEED 2ND.
Guide paper 2nd CST
Roller feed 2nd
Chassis cassette 2nd
Plate frame F
5-57
PLATE FRAME B (2nd CST)
1) Separate the Chassis cassette 2nd from the Main frame.
2) Pull out the Cassette 2nd.
3) Remove the Roller Feed 2ND. (See page 5-57)
4) Disconnect the connector of Solenoid.
5) Remove two Plate frame B mounting screws, and then remove the PLATE FRAME B.
Solenoid
Ground wire
Plate frame B
Chassis 2nd
5-58
PLATE FRAME B GEARS (2nd CST)
1) Separate the Chassis cassette 2nd from the Main frame.
2) Pull out the Cassette 2nd.
3) Remove the Roller Feed 2ND. (See page 5-57)
4) Remove the Plate frame B. (See page 5-58)
5) Remove one E-ring.
6) Remove the Spring C tracking.
7) Remove the Plate tracking.
8) Remove the Gear 48.
9) Remove one E-ring and remove the Shaft tracking, and then remove the Gear 34-0.8B.
10) Remove one E-ring, and then remove Gear 34-0.8C.
Shaft tracking
Spring C tracking
E-ring
Plate frame B
Gear 34-0.8B
Plate tracking
E-ring
Gear 34-0.8C E-ring
Gear 48
5-59
SPRING CLUTCH (2nd CST)
1) Separate the Chassis cassette 2nd from the Main frame.
2) Pull out the Cassette 2nd.
3) Remove the Roller Feed 2ND. (See page 5-57)
4) Remove the Plate frame B. (See page 5-58)
5) Remove three Holder gear 2ND mounting screws, and then remove the Holder gear 2ND.
6) Remove the SPRING CLUTCH.
Plate frame B
Spring clutch
Holder gear 2ND
SOLENOID (2nd CST)
1) Separate the Chassis cassette 2nd from the Main frame.
2) Pull out the Cassette 2nd.
3) Remove the Roller feed 2ND. (See page 5-57)
4) Remove the Plate frame B. (See page 5-58)
5) Remove the Solenoid mounting screw, and then remove the SOLENOID.
Solenoid
Plate frame B
5-60
SENSOR OPEN2
1) Separate the Chassis cassette 2nd from the Main frame.
2) Pull out the Cassette 2nd.
3) Remove the Roller feed 2ND. (See page 5-57)
4) Remove the Plate frame B. (See page 5-58)
5) Release the tab, and then remove the Sensor OPEN2.
Chassis 2nd
Sensor stopper
OPEN2
5-61
ROLLER FEED DUPLEX
1) Remove the Cover jam access.
2) Remove the Guide inner. (See page 5-48)
3) Remove two Guide upper JAC mounting screws, and then remove the Guide upper JAC.
Guide upper JAC
Cover jam access
4) Remove the Belt duplex from the Gear 20/25P.
5) Remove four E-rings, and then remove the Gear 20/25P.
Belt duplex
Gear 20/25P
Bearing
E-ring
E-ring
E-rings
Gear 20/25P
Bearing
Bearing
5-62
6) Remove one bearing, and slide out the ROLLER FEED DUPLEX.
ROLELR FFED DUPLEX
5-63
TONER SENSOR 1, 2 (TS1, TS2)
1) Remove the Cover front. (See page 5-12)
2) Pull out the Cassette 1st.
3) Release the Knob pressure.
4) Pull out the Toner cartridge.
Knob pressure
Toner cartridge
Cassette 1st
5) Open the Cover jam access.
6) Pull out Drum cartridge.
Cover jam access
Drum cartridge
5-64
7) Release the locking tab, and then remove the Bracket toner sensor B.
Bracket toner sensor B
8) Remove the TS2 mounting screw, and then remove the TS2.
TS 2
Bracket toner sensor B
5-65
9) Release the locking tab, and then remove the Bracket toner sensor A.
Bracket toner sensor A
10) Remove the TS1 mounting screw, and then remove the TS1.
TS1
Bracket toner sensor A
5-66
SENSOR PES1
1) Pull out the Cassette 1st.
2) Using a short screwdriver, remove the Bracket sensor from the bottom (back) of the body.
Bracket sensor
3) Remove the Sensor stopper and connector, and then remove the PES1.
PES1
Bracket sensor
Sensor stopper
5-67
SENSOR OPEN1
1) Remove the Cover option. (See page 5-21)
2) Remove the Cover shield. (See page 5-21)
3) Remove the Cover back. (See page 5-33)
4) Remove the Sensor stopper.
5) Disconnect the connector of Sensor, and then remove the Sensor OPEN1.
Sensor stopper
OPEN1
5-68
LED
1) Remove the Chassis FBS. (See page 5-33)
2) Open the Cover jam access.
3) Open the Cover front.
4) Remove the Cover left.
5) Remove the Tray paper exit.
6) Remove the Drum cartridge and the case DEV.
7) Disconnect the Film harness of the PCB CONNECT C.
8) Remove two Ground wires.
9) Remove two Stay LED mounting screws, and then remove the Stay LED.
Note: When connecting the Film harness, exactly adjust the Contact side.
Ground wire
Stay LED
Film harness Ground wire
10) Remove the LED.
Ground wire
LED
Ground wire
Film harness
5-69
5.3 Adjustment
5.3.1 Outline of printer registration adjustment
1.Adjust the printer registration of the first cassette.
2.Adjust the scan position and zoom for ADF and FBS.
3.After performing step1 and 2, adjust printer position for each cassette.
5.3.2 Printer registration mode
This mode adjusts the print registration for each paper source.
1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <3>.
2. Select the paper source you want to adjust.
3. Select “Vertical registration” or “Horizontal registration”.
4. Adjust the printer registration:
For example:
When you set “+12.3” for Vertical registration, the printing image moves 12.3 mm downward. If you set
“–12.3”, the printing image moves 12.3 mm upward.
When you set “+12.3” for Horizontal registration, the printing image moves 12.3 mm rightward. If you
set “”–12.3”, the printing image moves 12.3 mm leftward. You can adjust between ”–12.7 mm” and
“+12.7 mm”.
5. Press [Enter] to save the settings.
6. To return to the standby, press <Reset>.
Note: If you adjust the printer registration using this mode, the value entered by the machine parameter will also
be overwritten.
5-70
Printer registration (top)
A
A
Test pattern H
Adjust so that width A on the test pattern Checkered output falls within the following range.
Standard
Adjustment Tool
Machine parameter: 180, 220
10 ± 1.5 (mm)
Machine parameter: 240
Setting Range
0 to 12.7 (mm)
(0.1 mm step)
-12.8 to 12.7 (mm)
(0.1 mm step)
Adjustment procedure
1. Load legal (for USA version) or A4 (for GBR version) size paper to the cassette or tray you want
to adjust.
2. Use the Unique Switch 52 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (bit 0, 10)
3. Printout the test pattern “Ladder”. (Press <Setting> , <*> , <0> , <9> , [Test Pattern Print] ,
[Ladder].)
4. Check width A on the test pattern Ladder meets the specifications.
If width A falls outside the specified range, perform following steps to make the adjustment.
5. To use the “Printer registration mode,” press <Setting> , <*> , <4> , <3> and then select the cassette.
6. Select “Vertical Regi ”, and then adjust the “Vertical Registration”.
If the width A is shorter than the standard, increase value.
If the width A is longer than the standard, decrease value.
7. After you have finished the adjustment, you must reenter the setting of Unique Switch 52, you
changed in step 2.
Important: The setting you have entered in Printer registration mode is reflected in the following
Machine parameters.
Cassette 1: Machine parameter 180, 220, 240
Cassette 2: Machine parameter 181, 221, 241
Bypass Tray:Machine parameter 187, 227, 247
Duplex Unit: Machine parameter 188, 228, 248
• Machine Parameter 180 to 188 –– Adjust the start point to printing. (Vertical)
• Machine Parameter 220 to 228 –– Adjust the top margin.
• Machine Parameter 240 to 248 –– Adjust the bottom margin.
5-71
Printer registration (side)
A
A
Test pattern H
Adjust so that width A on the test pattern Checkered output falls within the following range.
Standard
Adjustment Tool
10 ± 1.8 (mm)
Machine parameter: 100, 140, 160
Setting Range
–12.8 to 12.7 (mm)
(0.6773 mm step)
Adjustment procedure
1. Load legal (for USA version) or A4 (for GBR version) size paper to the cassette or tray you want
to adjust.
2. Use the Unique Switch 52 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (bit 0, 10)
3. Printout the test pattern “Ladder”. (Press <Setting> , <*> , <0> , <9> , [Test Pattern Print] ,
[Ladder].)
4. Check width A on the test pattern Ladder meets the specifications.
If width A falls outside the specified range, perform following steps to make the adjustment.
5. To use the “Printer registration mode,” press <Setting> , <*> , <4> , <3> and then select the cassette.
6. Select “Vertical Regi ”, and then adjust the “Vertical Registration”.
If the width A is shorter than the standard, increase value.
If the width A is longer than the standard, decrease value.
7. After you have finished the adjustment, you must reenter the setting of Unique Switch 52, you
changed in step 2.
Important: The setting you have entered in Printer registration mode is reflected in the following
Machine parameters.
Cassette1 :
Machine parameter 100, 140, 160
Cassette2 :
Machine parameter 101, 141, 161
Bypass Tray : Machine parameter 107, 147, 167
Duplex Unit: Machine parameter 108, 148, 168
5-72
5.3.3 Registration adjustment
FBS registration (top)
1.25
1.00
0.20
0.25
0.75
Test Chart
0.15
0.30
0.55
A
0.10
1.40
Edge of the paper
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette
and FBS zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.
Standard
Adjustment Tool
0 ± 2.2 (mm)
Machine parameter:018
Setting Range
– 2.70 ~ 2.70 (mm)
(0.0212 mm step)
Adjustment procedure
1. Load legal (for USA version) or A4 (for GBR version) size paper to the 1st cassette.
2. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2003-01 on the FBS glass.
3. Make a copy of it in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification.
4. Check that the difference of width A and the copy of A (A’) meets the specifications.
If the difference falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.
5. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <0>)
6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 018 to meet the specification.
If the width A is shorter than the standard, decrease value.
If the width A is longer than the standard, increase value.
5-73
FBS registration (side)
A
1.40
0.10
Test Chart
0.15
0.20
1.00
1.25
Edge of
the paper
0.75
0.25
0.55
0.30
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette
and FBS zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.
Standard
Adjustment Tool
0 ± 2.6 (mm)
Machine parameter:015
Setting Range
– 10.76 ~ 10.76 (mm)
(0.0847 mm step)
Adjustment procedure
1. Load legal (for USA version) or A4 (for GBR version) size paper to the 1st cassette.
2. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2003-01 on the FBS glass.
3. Make a copy of it in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification.
4. Check that the difference of width A and the copy of A (A’) meets the specifications.
If the difference falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.
5. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <0>)
6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 015 to meet the specification.
If the width A is shorter than the standard, increase value.
If the width A is longer than the standard, decrease value.
5-74
ADF registration (top)
1.25
1.00
0.20
0.25
0.75
Test Chart
0.15
0.30
0.55
A
0.10
1.40
Edge of the paper
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette
and ADF zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.
Standard
Adjustment Tool
0 ± 2.2 (mm)
Machine parameter:013
Setting Range
–10.76 ~ 10.76 (mm)
(0.0847 mm step)
Adjustment procedure
1. Load legal (for USA version) or A4 (for GBR version) size paper to the 1st cassette.
2. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2003-01 on the ADF.
3. Make a copy of it in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification.
4. Check that the difference of width A and the copy of A (A’) meets the specifications.
If the difference falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.
5. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <0>)
6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 013 to meet the specification.
If the width A is shorter than the standard, decrease value.
If the width A is longer than the standard, increase value.
5-75
ADF registration (side)
A
1.40
0.10
Test Chart
0.15
0.20
1.00
1.25
Edge of
the paper
0.75
0.25
0.55
0.30
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette
and ADF zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.
Standard
Adjustment Tool
0 ± 2.9 (mm)
Machine parameter:010
Setting Range
– 10.76 ~ 10.76 (mm)
(0.0847 mm step)
Adjustment procedure
1. Load legal (for USA version) or A4 (for GBR version) size paper to the 1st cassette.
2. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2003-01 on the ADF.
3. Make a copy of it in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification.
4. Check that the difference of width A and the copy of A (A’) meets the specifications.
If the difference falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.
5. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <0>)
6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 010 to meet the specification.
If the width A is shorter than the standard, decrease value.
If the width A is longer than the standard, increase value.
5-76
5.3.4 Zoom adjustment
FBS zoom adjustment (Vertical)
1.40
0.10
0.55
0.30
0.40
0.35
0.35
0.25
0.75
0.20
1.00
1.25
0.15
A
0.40
0.55
0.30
2003-01
NO.20031021
0.25
0.75
1.25
0.15
0.20
1.00
0.10
1.40
L
R
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette
have been made.
The difference should be within ± 1.0% of the actual length of A on the test chart No. 2003-01.
Adjust so that the following specifications are satisfied with the length of A on the test chart
No.2003-01.
Zoom ratio
Standard
Adjustment Tool
Setting Range
– 1.5 to 1.5 %
100 %
± 1.0 %
Machine parameter:017
(0.1 % step)
Adjustment procedure
1. Load legal (for USA version) or A4 (for GBR version) size paper to the first cassette.
2. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2003-01 on the FBS.
3. Make two copies on paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification.
4. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference.
If length A falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.
5. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <0>)
6. Adjust so that the setting of Machine Parameter 017 meets the specification.
If length A is shorter than the standard, increase value.
If length A is longer than the standard, decrease value.
5-77
1.40
0.10
1.25
0.15
1.00
0.20
0.75
0.25
0.55
0.30
0.40
0.35
0.35
FBS zoom adjustment (Horizontal)
0.40
A
2003-01
0.30
0.55
NO.20031021
1.00
0.20
0.25
0.75
0.15
1.25
0.10
1.40
L
R
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette
have been made.
The difference should be within ± 1.0 % of the actual length of A on the test chart No.2003-01.
Adjust so that the following specifications satisfies the length of A on the test chart No. 2003-01.
Zoom ratio
Standard
Adjustment Tool
Setting Range
– 1.5 to 1.5 %
100 %
± 1.0 %
Machine parameter:016
(0.1 % step)
Adjustment procedure
1. Load legal (for USA version) or A4 (for GBR version) size paper to the first cassette.
2. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2003-01 on the FBS.
3. Make two copies on paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification.
4. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference.
If length A falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.
5. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <0>)
6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 016 to meet the specification.
If the length A is shorter than the standard, increase value.
If the length A is longer than the standard, decrease value.
5-78
ADF zoom adjustment (Vertical)
1.40
0.10
0.55
0.30
0.40
0.35
0.35
0.25
0.75
0.20
1.00
1.25
0.15
A
0.40
0.55
0.30
2003-01
NO.20031021
0.25
0.75
0.20
1.00
0.15
1.25
0.10
1.40
L
R
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette
have been made.
The difference should be within ± 1.0 % of the actual length of A on the test chart No.
2003-01. Adjust so that the following specifications are satisfied with the length of A on the
test chart No.2003-01.
Zoom ratio
Standard
Adjustment Tool
100 %
± 1.0 %
Machine parameter:012
Setting Range
– 1.5 to 1.5 %
(0.1 % step)
Adjustment procedure
1. Load legal (for USA version) or A4 (for GBR version) size paper to the first cassette.
2. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2003-01 on the ADF.
3. Make two copies on paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification.
4. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference.
If length A falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.
5. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <0>)
6. Adjust so that the setting of Machine Parameter 012 meets the specification.
If the length A is shorter than the standard, increase value.
If the length A is longer than the standard, decrease value.
5-79
1.40
0.10
1.25
0.15
1.00
0.20
0.75
0.25
0.55
0.30
0.40
0.35
0.35
ADF zoom adjustment (Horizontal)
0.40
A
2003-01
0.30
0.55
NO.20031021
1.00
0.20
0.25
0.75
0.15
1.25
0.10
1.40
L
R
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette
have been made.
The difference should be within ± 1.0 % of the actual length of A on the test chart
No.2003-01. Adjust so that the following specifications are satisfied with the length of A on
the test chart No. 2003-01.
Zoom ratio
Standard
Adjustment Tool
100 %
± 1.0 %
Machine parameter:011
Setting Range
– 1.5 to 1.5 %
(0.1 % step)
Adjustment procedure
1. Load legal (for USA version) or A4 (for GBR version) size paper to the first cassette.
2. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2003-01 in the ADF.
3. Make two copies on paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification.
4. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference.
If length A falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.
5. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <0>)
6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 011 to meet the specification.
If the length A is shorter than the standard, increase value.
If the length A is longer than the standard, decrease value.
5-80
5.3.5 SEPARATION PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT
1) Open the Guide outer.
2) Pick up the Roller separator.
3) Remove the assy cover separator. (See page 5-37)
Cover separator
Roller separator
Rotate direction
Separation pressure
Clockwise
Up
Counterclockwise
Down
5-81
5.3.6 CLEANING THE MIRRORS A, B AND C
For MFX-2050 / MFX-1450
1) Remove the Cover contact. (See page 5-17)
2) Lift the front of the Frame scanner and remove the Cover lens and Case lamp.
For F-565 / F-525
1) Remove the Cover ADF base. (See page 5-7)
2) Remove the Cover top PPF. (See page 5-13)
3) Remove the Cover lens.
Now the mirrors A and C are accessible.
1) Clean mirrors A and C.
2) Peel the Cover scanner off the back of the Frame scanner.
3) Now the mirrors B are accessible. Clean mirrors.
Mirror A
Mirror B
Mirror C
Cover scanner
5-82
6 Options
CAUTION: This installation should be done by an authorized Muratec technician.
6.1 Memory Upgrade
An optional 32 MB document memory upgrade is available.
6.1.1 Packaging contents:
1. Memory module (32 MB) ................................................1
6.1.2 Installation
1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.
2. Remove the covers.
1) Remove one screw and the connect cover.
2) Unplug the harness that is going through the connect cover.
3) Remove two screws and the option cover.
4) Remove five screws and the shield cover.
Connect cover
Shield cover
Option cover
3. Release three screws, one Spacer, and then PCB NGP.
Spacer
Network PCB
4. Holding the memory module only by the edges, gently but firmly set the memory module to the
memory slot (P1 connector), then push it until it snaps.
6-1
5. Reattach the PCB NGP and the covers.
6. Plug the power cord and turn the machine on.
7. Initialize the memory module by pressing <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <6>, and [Yes].
Note: This setting ( [DRAM clear] ) will erase all of stored documents in the machine’s memory.
8. Perform the memory test ( [DRAM clear] ) by the following procedure.
1) Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [DRAM Check] .
2)Use the numeric keys and one-touch keys [01] through [06] to enter Hex code (00 to FF), and
press <Start>.
Use the sharp key (#) to enter A, B, C, D, E and F. See table below.
A
B
C
D
E
F
#, 0
#, 1
#, 2
#, 3
#, 4
#, 5
3)Enter RAM check area by number. (See table below)
Press
Check area
0
All DRAMs
1
The standard memory on the main control board
2
The first half of the 32MB Optional Memory PCB
3
The second half of the 32MB Optional Memory PCB
4) Press <Start>.
5) The machine shows the checked result. Press <Reset> to go back to the standby mode.
9. Print the “Fax Settings List” by pressing <Setting>, [List], [Setting List], [Fax Setting], and [Yes] to
see the memory amount becomes 40960 KB (40 MB).
10. Turn the machine off.
11. Reattach the covers and the harness.
6-2
6.2 Second paper cassette
6.2.1 Packaging contents:
1. Optional paper cassette.................................... 1
2. Second cassette back cover............................. 1
3. Screws . ........................................................... 5
4. Paper size label ............................................... 1
6.2.2 Installation
1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.
2. Remove the covers.
1) Remove the connect cover screw and the cover.
2) Unplug the harness that is going through the connect cover.
3) Remove the two screws and the option cover.
4) Remove the five screws and the shield cover.
Connect cover
Shield cover
Option cover
3. Set the machine on top of the optional cassette.
Note:Make sure the machine is lined-up with the second cassette before you attempt to set the
machine down.
4. Slide the harness through the machine and attach the connector (P93).
5. Connect the backside of the machine using two screws.
6. Attach the backside of the second cassette using one screw.
Screw A
Screw A
Screw B
6-3
7. Open the first cassette and attach both screws both ends using two screws.
8.Reattach the covers and the harness.
9. Press <Setting>, [Paper Setting].
10.Select [Cassette 2].
(US version)
(European version)
11.Select the paper size of the second paper cassette, and press [Enter].
12. Press <Reset> to exit.
13. Apply the correct paper size label to the cassette.
6-4
6.3 Page Counter
The mechanical counter shows the total number of pages the machine prints.
Note: This device counts up to 999,999 pages. If more pages are printed, the counter resets to zero
and begins counting the new pages from that point.
6.3.1 Packaging contents:
1. Mechanical counter ......................................... 1
2. Relay cable . .................................................... 1
3. Screw .............................................................. 1
6.3.2 Installation
1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.
2. Remove the covers.
1) Remove the connect cover screw and the cover.
2) Unplug the harness that is going through the connect cover.
3) Remove the two screws and the option cover.
4) Remove the five screws and the shield cover.
5) Remove the two screws and the back cover.
Back cover
Connect cover
Option cover
Shield cover
3.Gently punch out the panel on the back cover.
6-5
4. Fasten the counter to the machine frame using a screw.
5. Connect the relay cable to the P94 connector on connection board B.
6. Attach the other end of the relay cable to the counter cable.
P94
Connection board B
Relay cable
Counter
7. Reattach the covers and the harness.
Be sure that wires are not caught when reattaching the covers.
The counter will now count the number of pages printed.
Note: When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board,
be sure to ground your body.
6-6
6.4 PCL printer controller
6.4.1 Packaging contents:
1. PCL printer board............................................. 1
2. Spacers............................................................ 2
3. Screw .............................................................. 2
4. CD ................................................................... 1
Note: Two screws are included, but only one is required to for installation.
6.4.2 Installation
1.Turn the power off and unplug the power cord.
2. Remove the covers.
1) Remove the connect cover screw and the cover.
2) Unplug the harness that is going through the connect cover.
3) Remove the two screws and the option cover.
4) Remove the five screws and the shield cover.
Connect cover
Shield cover
Option cover
3. Attach two spacers to the Main PCB.
4.Attach the PCL printer board to the machine and connect the cable to the P82 connector.
5. Attach the left side of the PCL printer board using one screw.
6. Reattach the shield cover and the option cover.
7. Connect the ADF cable to the connector on the PCB bracket.
8. Reattach the connect cover.
*Use the enclosed CD to install the print drivers.
6-7
6.5 Second phone line kit
This option is not available in every country.
6.5.1 Packaging contents:
1. Modem PCB..................................................... 1
2. NCU PCB......................................................... 1
3. Telephone line cable........................................ 1
4. Label . .............................................................. 4
5. Spacers ........................................................... 1
6. Screw A ........................................................... 6
7. Screw B ........................................................... 4
8. Ferrite core....................................................... 1
9. Operation manual............................................. 1
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Line2
Note: 6 screws (A) are included, but only 2 are required to for installation.
Note: The telephone line cable looks different according to the country.
6.5.2 Installation
1. Turn the power off and unplug the power cord.
2. Remove the covers.
1) Remove the connect cover screw and the cover.
2) Unplug the harness that is going through the connect cover.
3) Remove the two screws and the option cover.
4) Remove the five screws and the shield cover.
Connect cover
Shield cover
3.Use the nippers to carefully punch out the panel on the option cover.
6-8
Option cover
(8)
4. Attach two spacers to the main board.
5. Attach the Modem PCB to the spacers and screw the right side of the board to the machine frame
using two screws. (Screw A)
6. Attach the NCU PCB onto the Main PCB using four screws. (Screw B)
7. Connect the harness to the NCU PCB.
8. Clamp the harness to the NCU PCB’s bracket.
9. Reattach the covers and the harness.
10. Wind the telephone line around the ferrite core and connect it to Line 2.
11. Attach the “Line 2” label above the plug.
LIN
E2
6-9
Download PDF